AnyMedia Access System (30 Channel) - Nokia Networks · AnyMedia® Access System (30 Channel) Data...
Transcript of AnyMedia Access System (30 Channel) - Nokia Networks · AnyMedia® Access System (30 Channel) Data...
AnyMedia ® Access System(30 Channel)Data Sheet BookReleases up to R1.38.1 and R3.6
363-211-251CC109218651
Issue 14September 2008
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of theirrespective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
Notice
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in this information product was accurate at the time of printing. However,information is subject to change.
Ordering information
See“How to order” (p. xii).
Technical support
Technical support is available forAnyMedia® Access System indoor/outdoor applications, forAnyMedia® 800 Access System, forAnyMediaLAG System, and forAnyMediaElement Manager (Navis AnyMediaElement Manager).
AnyMediaservice is complemented by a full range of services available to support planning, maintaining and operating your system.Applications testing, network integration, and upgrade conversion support is available.
Alcatel-Lucent service personnel will troubleshoot field problems 24 h a day over the phone and on site (if necessary) based on Alcatel-Lucentservice contracts by Local/Regional Customer Support (LCS/RCS) and by Remote Technical Support (RTS).
Contacting your Alcatel-Lucent support: For Europe call the International Customer Management Center (ICMC): +353 1692 4579 or call thetoll free number: 00 800 00 58 2368. For Asia Pacific, Caribbean and Latin America Region, Saudi Arabia, Middle East and Africa call thelocal Alcatel-Lucent Customer Technical Support Team.
Contents
About this information product
Purpose........................................................................................................................................................................................... viivii
Reason for reissue...................................................................................................................................................................... viivii
Safety information..................................................................................................................................................................... viivii
Intended audience...................................................................................................................................................................... viivii
Conventions used....................................................................................................................................................................... viivii
Related documentation.............................................................................................................................................................. xixi
How to order................................................................................................................................................................................ xiixii
How to comment........................................................................................................................................................................ xiixii
1 Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1
Structure of hazard statements............................................................................................................................................ 1-21-2
2 List of all packs used in the AnyMedia ® Access System
List of used packs.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1
3 Common packs for narrowband services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1
Common data and control (COMDAC) COM501/COM501B.............................................................................. 3-23-2
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM503/COM503B................................................................... 3-63-6
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520........................................................................................ 3-103-10
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521........................................................................................ 3-143-14
Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501......................................................................................... 3-183-18
E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B........................................................................................................... 3-243-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
iii
High level data link control (IO_HDLC) IDC500/IDC500B.............................................................................. 3-283-28
4 Common packs for ATM xDSL services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longer orderable)................................................................... 4-24-2
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901................................................................................................................ 4-64-6
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longer orderable).................................................................... 4-114-11
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911................................................................................................................. 4-154-15
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920................................................................................................................... 4-204-20
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941................................................................................................................. 4-254-25
5 Common packs for IP-based services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)................................................................................... 5-25-2
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)................................................................................... 5-75-7
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903............................................................................................................................. 5-125-12
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904............................................................................................................................. 5-175-17
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905............................................................................................................................. 5-225-22
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906............................................................................................................................. 5-275-27
IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960......................................................................................................... 5-325-32
ESIM LPE408 as controller............................................................................................................................................... 5-375-37
6 Application packs for narrowband services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1
ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports).............................................................................................................. 6-26-2
ISDN application pack LPU132 (32 U Ports).............................................................................................................. 6-66-6
ISDN application pack LPU430 (16 U Ports).............................................................................................................. 6-96-9
ISDN application pack LPU432 (32 U Ports)........................................................................................................... 6-126-12
ISDN application pack LPU508 (8 U Ports).............................................................................................................. 6-156-15
POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longer orderable)................................................................ 6-186-18
POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable) and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)......................... 6-236-23
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports)............................................................................................................ 6-296-29
POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)............................................................................................................ 6-336-33
POTS application pack LPZ600 (VoIP AP)................................................................................................................ 6-386-38
POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports).......................................................................................... 6-396-39
HDSL application pack (HDSL AP) LPS501/LPS503/LPS504.......................................................................... 6-446-44
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510....................................................................................................... 6-496-49
7 Application packs for ATM xDSL services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1
ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longer orderable)..................................................................... 7-27-2
ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longer orderable)...................................................................... 7-67-6
ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longer orderable)............................................................ 7-107-10
ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416............................................................................................................ 7-147-14
ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417............................................................................................................. 7-197-19
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420....................................................................................................... 7-247-24
ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432............................................................................................................ 7-287-28
ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434............................................................................................................. 7-337-33
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438........................................................................................................ 7-377-37
SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longer orderable).................................................................... 7-417-41
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702.......................................................................................................... 7-457-45
E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941....................................................................................................... 7-507-50
8 Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1
Application pack (P32A32) LPA832................................................................................................................................ 8-28-2
Application pack (P32A32) LPA833................................................................................................................................ 8-88-8
9 Application packs for IP-based services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1
IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600.......................................................................................................... 9-29-2
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600................................................................................................................... 9-79-7
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
v
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602................................................................................................................ 9-129-12
Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633................................................................................................................ 9-189-18
VSIM application pack LPV417...................................................................................................................................... 9-239-23
ESIM application pack LPE408....................................................................................................................................... 9-289-28
10 Service independent common packs
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100.................................................................................................................... 10-210-2
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU500.................................................................................................................... 10-710-7
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU510.................................................................................................................. 10-1010-10
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550.................................................................................................................. 10-1310-13
Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) RGP100................................................................................................................... 10-1710-17
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU501................................................................................................................................. 10-2010-20
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU502................................................................................................................................. 10-2310-23
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU503................................................................................................................................. 10-2610-26
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU520................................................................................................................................. 10-2910-29
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU503............................................................................................................................ 10-3110-31
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU520............................................................................................................................ 10-3310-33
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU523............................................................................................................................ 10-3510-35
Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)............................................................................................ 10-3710-37
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
About this information productAbout this information product
Purpose
This Data Sheet Book provides the following information for each common pack andfor each application pack of Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System (30 Channel):
• An overview of the pack
• Specific information about the features and functions of the pack
• Specifications for transportation, storage and operation of the pack
• A functional block diagram of the pack
• The faceplate of the pack
• Tables detailing faceplate LED indicators and connectors
• The physical dimensions of the pack.
Reason for reissue
This is the first issue of this document. Information that is added, deleted, or changedin future releases will be summarized in this notice.
Safety information
This information product contains hazard statements for your safety. Hazard statementsare given at points where safety consequences to personnel, equipment, and operationmay exist. Failure to follow these statements may result in serious consequences.
Intended audience
Users of this document include internal marketing, order, and service personnel, aswell as external customers (network providers).
Conventions used
The following conventions are used throughout this Data Sheet Book.
Acronyms and abbreviations
In the text acronyms are expanded the first time they are used in the main text of achapter (for example permanent leased line (PLL)). If the acronym is a trademark, itwill not be spelled out. A list of acronyms is provided at the end of this document.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008,
vii
Apparatus code followed by empty parentheses
An apparatus code followed by empty parentheses″()″ includes the letter-suffixedversions of the circuit pack. For example, ADSL4p LPA400( ) represents the ADSL4pLPA400 AP and/or the ADSL4p LPA400B AP.
Commands
AnyMedia® Access System TL1 command names and messages are displayed inconstant-width font and are uppercase (for example RTRV-COND).
Terms used (alphabetically ordered)
The following are terms used in this Data Sheet Book that may have a differentmeaning than the general or common use of the term.
• a/b-cablesrefer generically to the tip/ring pair cables that attach to the faceplate ofall application packs (APs).
• In the AnyMedia® Access System, the termaccessmeans that the system providesthe primary service interface for the subscriber to enter the network.
• ADSL linerefers to the twisted copper pair carrying ADSL and narrowbandservices.
• ADSL modemmeans the ADSL data circuit-terminating equipment at thesubscriber’s site.
• ADSL servicesrefers to all services provided by ADSL APs and by the ADSL partof combo APs.
• AFM refers to all ATM feeder multiplexers regardless of the feeder type.
• The ATM feeder multiplexerAFME3 provides an E3 ATM user network interface.If a DS3 interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFMDS3has to be usedinstead, if an E1 interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFME1 has to beused, or if an STM-1/OC-3c interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexerAFMO has to be used.
• The termAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf is used when the text especially refers to thebasic ETSI shelf with 16 AP slots. It houses the COMDAC(s), CIU and AFM(s).
• The termAnyMedia® LAG Shelf is generally used for anAnyMedia® shelf with ahigh capacity backplane, independently of the physical design of the shelf. Ithouses COMDAC(s), CIU and AFM(s). Currently oneAnyMedia® LAG Shelf isavailable, theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.In comparison to anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf the backplane of theAnyMedia®
LAG Shelf has expanded capacity.
• The AnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf is a specific LAG Shelf. It is designed as adouble-row LAG Shelf housed in an indoor cabinet.EachAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf may contain one NB subsystem and up to twoBB subsystems.In comparison to anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf the backplane of theAnyMedia®
LAG 4300 Shelf has expanded capacity.
About this information product
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
,
• The termAnyMedia® Mainshelf is used in a description that refers to anyAnyMedia® shelf that may contain COMDAC(s), CIU, and AFM(s), regardlesswhether it is anAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf, anAnyMedia® LAG Shelf or anAnyMedia® 800 Shelf.
• The termAnyMedia® shelves is used whenever the text does not need todistinguish between the shelf types. It is mostly used where services and servicepacks are described.
• The AnyMedia® 800 Shelf consists of a shelf very similar to anAnyMedia® ETSIV5 Shelf, but 8 slots are equipped with an internal power subshelf instead of APs.
• ATM Operations Channelis an ATM permanent virtual connection configured totransmit OAM&P information.
• ATM OAM&P interfaces in the AnyMedia® Access System include the followingalternatives for connecting OAM&P interfaces:
– Console port on the AFM faceplate
– 10Base-T port on the AFM faceplate
– ATM Operations Channel
• ATM xDSL servicesrefer to all typically supported ADSL, SDSL, and SHDSLservices and future digital subscriber line (DSL) services.
• In some occurrences the termbroadbandis used for ATM xDSL related termswhere ATM xDSL would be too specific or not commonly used (e.g. broadbandbus).
• Combo pack refers to an AP that supports narrowband services and ADSL servicescombined on one physical subscriber port.
• The termcustomer premises equipment(CPE) in general covers subscriber’sinstallation and subscriber’s terminal. For ADSL lines the CPE consists amongother equipment of an ADSL modem and a splitter (to separate the narrowbandsignal from the data signal). If both units are meant as a whole the term customerpremises equipment (CPE) is used in this manual.
• The termDS3 interface refers to a bit rate of 44.736 Mbps and a framingaccording to ITU-T recommendations G.804, I.432 and ANSI T1.107. withoutspecifying the physical interface.
• The termDSX-3interface refers to everything that DS3 refers to with the additionof a specific physical interface according to Bellcore standard GR-499. The ATMfeeder multiplexer AFMDS3 provides a DSX-3 interface. In this manual the moregeneral term DS3 interface is used.
• E1 interfacerefers to the 2048-kbps digital feeder interfaces on the network side.
• E3 interfacerefers to the 34.368-Mbps digital feeder interface that carries the ATMpayload cells. The E3 interface is provided by the ATM feeder multiplexer AFM.
• The general termE1 link may be a physical E1 link when using a TDMCOMDAC.
• The general termElement Management System(EMS) denotes a software tool usedfor management actions and tasks. The element management system designed forthe AnyMedia® Access System is theNavis™ AnyMedia® Element ManagementSystem (NAM).
About this information product
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008,
ix
• The AnyMedia® Graphical System Interface software (GSI)includes narrowbandand ATM xDSL services.
• The termGSI/EMSstands for the function of the network management system forthe AnyMedia® Access System, independent of using the GSI or another EMS likethe NAM.
• Inbandsignaling viaATM Operations Channelwithin ATM permanent virtualconnection (PVC) means sending messages not via a special OAM&P interface butembedded in the ATM cell stream.
• Mixed configurationmeans a configuration of theAnyMedia® shelves includingpacks for narrowband services and for ATM xDSL services.
• The Navis™ AnyMedia® Element Management System (NAM) is an elementmanagement system (EMS) that includes network management capabilities fornarrowband and ATM xDSL services.
• Narrowband servicestypically include POTS services, permanent leased line (PLL)and ISDN as well as n-times 64 kbps to 2 Mbps.
• The termpack is generally used for common packs (COMDAC, CIU, IO_E1,IO_HDLC, PFU, AFME3, AFMDS3) and application packs (APs).
• SDSL servicesrefers to all services provided by SDSL APs.
• SHDSL servicesrefers to all services provided by SHDSL APs.
• The term[S]HDSL refers to both: HDSL and SHDSL (narrowband services).
• The termsystem applicationis used here for theAnyMedia® Access System whenthe text refers to it how a certain network element is used with respect to services.
• The termsystem configurationis used here for theAnyMedia® Access Systemwhen the text refers to it as a system equipped with certain packs or units for acertain application including the related database.
• TDM COMDACgenerally refers to a COMDAC in a system configuration withIO_E1 packs where the narrowband signals are transported within physical E1 linksacross a TDM network.
• TL1 system interface(TL1SI) means any interface for operations using TL1commands.
• V5.x is used whenever the following text refers to V5.1 as well as to V5.2.
• xDSL servicemeans any ATM xDSL service transmitted over twisted pairs.Examples are ADSL, SDSL, SHDSL, universal asymmetric digital subscriber line(UDSL), and very high bit rate digital subscriber line (VDSL).
• In this manual the subscriber interface for analog POTS is namedZ interface. Insome countries this interface can be called a/b-interface where the a-leg sometimesmay be called tip and the b-leg ring.
Trademarks
Trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent and other companies are in italics. They are identifiedwith the registered mark (®) or trademark (™) symbol the first time the trademarks areused in the text (for example Alcatel-LucentAnyMedia® Access System).
About this information product
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
,
Related documentation
The following is orderable documentation related to theAnyMedia® Access Systemand for additional components. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xii).Additionally, these information products are accessible from the Alcatel-Lucent’internal web page: http://access.de.lucent.com/ACCESS/cdoc/index.html
Manual Type Comcode CIC OrderingNumber ( 1)
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Overview 109 562 744 363-211-585
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowband andATM xDSL services
109 562 751 363-211-586
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), IP-based services 109 562 769 363-211-587
Data Sheet Book 109 218 651 363-211-251
Ordering Guide 109 097 782 363-211-144
Commands and Procedures for Narrowband Services withTDM COMDAC
109 105 635 363-211-119
Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL Services 109 024 737 363-211-133
Commands and Procedures for IP-based Services 109 562 736 363-211-555
Installation Manual for DC-Powered Racks for ETSI V5 andLAG 1900 Shelves
109 576 140 363-211-603 (2)
Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and DC-powered racks 109 024 752 363-211-207 (3)
Installation Manual for AC-powered racks 109 024 745 363-211-206
AnyMedia® LAG 4300 System, Installation Manual (IM) 109 461 939 363-211-256
Customer Documentation on CD-ROM 108 298 787 363-211-114
Notes:
1. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xii).
2. Applicable for the new DC-powered racks based on CABI600 mechanics (J1C293B-1 L1 andJ1C301B-1 L1)
3. Applicable for the established DC-powered racks J1C283B-1 L2 and J1C293A-1 L2.
Print copy (hard copy)
All listed documents are available in print.
CD-ROM
The following table lists the information products for theAnyMedia® Access Systemwhich are available in PDF format and/or in HTML format on CD-ROM. An AdobeAcrobat Reader® is provided to view them.
About this information product
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008,
xi
CD-ROM Comcode Ordering Number
AnyMedia® Access System Customer Documentation onCD-ROM includes:
• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Overview inpdf format
• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowbandand ATM xDSL services in pdf format
• Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), IP-basedservices in pdf format
• Data Sheet Book in pdf format
• Ordering Guide in pdf format
• Commands and procedures for Narrowband Services withTDM COMDAC in HTML and pdf format
• Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL Services inHTML and pdf format
• Commands and Procedures for IP-based Services inHTML and pdf format
• Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and forDC-powered Racks in pdf format
• Installation Manual for AC-powered Racks in pdf format
• Description of TL1 commands in HTML format
108298787 363-211-114 (1)
Notes:
1. For the ordering address see“How to order” (p. xii).
How to order
These documents and drawings can be ordered at or downloaded from theAlcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support Site (OLCS)(https://support.lucent.com) orthrough your Local Customer Support.
How to comment
To comment on this information product, go to theOnline Comment Form(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to theComments Hotline ([email protected]).
About this information product
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
,
1 1Safety
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter contains information on the hazard statements used in this document.
Contents
Structure of hazard statements 1-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
1-1
Structure of hazard statements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Hazard statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks onAlcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazardsmay have serious consequences.
General structure
Hazard statements include the following structural elements:
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Personal-injury symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury(optional)
2 Hazard-type symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage orinjury
5 Damage statement Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the hazard statement(optional)
Safety
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation (high risk) which, ifnot avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (medium risk) which,if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION When used with the personal injury symbol:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in personal injury.
When used without the personal injury symbol:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in property damage, such as serviceinterruption or damage to equipment or other materials.
Safety Structure of hazard statements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
1-3
2 2List of all packs used in theAnyMedia® Access System
List of used packs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Different applications of theAnyMedia® Access System require the use of differentcommon packs and application packs. The following tables list for each pack whetherit can be used in a configuration or not: “x” means, the pack is supported in theconfiguration, “-” means, the pack is not supported.
Common packs
The following table shows the common packs used in theAnyMedia® Access System.
The pack ... ... can be used in the
Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®
LAG 1900Shelf
upper row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
lower row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
AnyMedia ®
ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®
LAG 200 Shelf
COM501 COMDAC - - - x -
COM503 COMDAC x - - x -
COM520 COMDAC - x - - -
COM521 COMDAC - x - - -
DTP500 CIU x x - x -
DTP501 CIU x x - x -
FAC500 IO_E1 x x - x -
IDC500 IO_HDLC - - - x (1) -
LPA900 (2) AFMDS3 - - - x -
LPA901 AFMDS3 x x x x -
LPA910 (2) AFME3 - - - x -
LPA911 AFME3 x x x x -
LPA920 AFMO x x x x -
LPA941 AFME1 x x x x -
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
2-1
The pack ... ... can be used in the
Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®
LAG 1900Shelf
upper row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
lower row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
AnyMedia ®
ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®
LAG 200 Shelf
LPE408(controllermode)
ESIM, 8 fastEthernet (SFP)downlinks and 1GbE (SFP)uplink
- - - - x
LPI901 (2) IPFM - x - - -
LPI902 (2) IPFM x - - - -
LPI903 IPFM - x - - -
LPI904 IPFM x - - - -
LPI905 IPFM - x - - -
LPI906 IPFM x - - - -
LPI960 IP-AFM x x x x -
PFU501 PFU - - - x -
PFU502 PFU - - - - x
PFU503 PFU x - - - -
PFU520 PFU - x (in the Power DistributionPanel)
- -
RFU503 RFU x - - - -
RFU523 RFU - x (in the Power DistributionPanel)
- -
RGP100 RGP - x - - -
RGU100 RGU - x x x -
RGU500 RGU x - - - -
RGU510 RGU x - - - -
RGU550 RGU x - - - x
Notes:
1. The IO_HDLC pack is not supported when COM503 is used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.
2. No longer orderable; no longer supported. For details refer to the compatibility tables in the “OrderingGuide” 363-211-144.
Application packs
The following table shows the application packs used in theAnyMedia® AccessSystem.
List of all packs used in the AnyMedia® Access System List of used packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
The application pack ... ... can be used in the
Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®
LAG 1900Shelf
upper row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
lower row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
AnyMedia ®
ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®
LAG 200 Shelf
LPA400 (1) ADSL4p AP - - - x -
LPA408 (1) ADSL8p AP - x x x -
LPA414 (1) ADSL4i AP - x x x -
LPA416 ADSL16p AP x x x x -
LPA417 ADSL16i AP x x x x -
LPA420 ADSL2_16p AP x x (2) x (2) x -
LPA432 ADSL32p AP x x x x -
LPA434 ADSL32i AP x x x x -
LPA438 ADSL32i x x (2) x (2) x -
LPA633 IPADSL2_32p x x x x x
LPA832 P32A32 AP x x x x -
LPA833 P32A32 AP x x x x -
LPA941 E1-IMA AP - - - x -
LPE408 ESIM, 8 fastEthernet (SFP)downlinks and 1GbE (SFP)uplink
x x x x (3) x
LPI600 ICAP x x x x x (2)
LPP100 POTS AP, 24Z ports
x x x x -
LPS501 (1) HDSL AP - x x x -
LPS503 (1) HDSL AP - x x x -
LPS504 HDSL AP x x x x -
LPS510 SHDSL AP x x x x -
LPS702 SHDSL16 AP x x x x -
LPS716 (1) SDSL16 AP - - - x -
LPU112 ISDN AP, 12U ports
x x x x -
LPU132 ISDN AP, 32U ports
x x x x -
LPU430 ISDN AP, 16U ports
- - - x (4) -
LPU432 ISDN AP, 32U ports
x x (2) x (2) x -
LPU508 ISDN AP, 8U ports
x x x x -
List of all packs used in the AnyMedia® Access System List of used packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
2-3
The application pack ... ... can be used in the
Apparatus code Description AnyMedia ®
LAG 1900Shelf
upper row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
lower row oftheAnyMedia ®
LAG 4300Shelf
AnyMedia ®
ETSI V5 ShelfAnyMedia ®
LAG 200 Shelf
LPV417 VSIM AP, 16VDSL lines
x x x - x
LPZ100 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ110 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ120 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ121 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ122 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ123 POTS AP, 32Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ200 POTS AP, 32Z ports, TAPfunction
x x x x -
LPZ600 VoIP AP, 32subscriber lines
x x x x (3) x
LPZ602 VoIP AP, 64subscriber lines
x x x - x
LPZ640 POTS AP, 64Z ports
x x x x -
LPZ641 POTS AP, 64Z ports
x x x x -
TAP100 TAP x x x x -
TAP101 TAP x x x x -
Notes:
1. No longer orderable.
2. If this pack is required in this shelf type, contact your local customer team.
3. In theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf this pack is only supported in standalone mode.
4. This pack is not supported when COM503 is used in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf.
List of all packs used in the AnyMedia® Access System List of used packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3 3Common packs for narrowbandservices
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the common packs for narrowband services which are used inthe AnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
Common data and control (COMDAC) COM501/COM501B 3-2
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM503/COM503B 3-6
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520 3-10
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521 3-14
Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501 3-18
E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B 3-24
High level data link control (IO_HDLC) IDC500/IDC500B 3-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-1
Common data and control (COMDAC) COM501/COM501B...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The common data and control (COMDAC) provides the central control andtransmission fabric for theAnyMedia® Access System.
Features and functions
The COMDAC supports the following features and functions:
• Provides a full-access timeslot interchange (TSI)
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports remote and local management interfaces
• Provides system timing derived from E1 link or station clock
• Provides the microprocessor control complex
• Provides non-volatile data storage (NVDS) and non-volatile program storage(NVPS)
• Supports simplex and duplex operation.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109210575 (COM501B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the COMDAC COM501 functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the COMDAC COM501 faceplate.
TDM COMDAC
ApplicationPacks
CIU
ProcessorMemory &
ControlComplex
Full AccessTSI for
Call Processing
System Timing
TransmissionBandwidth
Communicationsand Control
TransmissionBandwidth
Communicationsand Control
External OS & Communication Interfaces
Power Module
+5V
Communicationsand Control
IO_E1
IO_HDLC
Common packs for narrowband services Common data and control (COMDAC)COM501/COM501B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-3
RT
H44
55A
AB
COM501COMDAC
n:mLucent
FAULT
FE
ACTIVE
CR
MJ
MN
NE
LED
Common packs for narrowband services Common data and control (COMDAC)COM501/COM501B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators (1 2) on the COMDAC COM501 faceplate:.
LED Function Color
FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the COMDAC and extinguisheswhen the fault condition clears
Lights if initial sanity check and/orinventory/program store checksum failed
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test) or waitingfor software download
Flashes at a rate of approximately 2 Hz duringsoftware download.
Red
ACTIVE Indicates COMDAC is in-service. Green
CR Lit when a critical alarm is detected in thesystem.
Red
MJ Lit when a major alarm is detected in thesystem.
Red
MN Lit when a minor alarm is detected in thesystem.
Yellow
NE Indicates an alarm or abnormal condition existsat the shelf or at the associated cabinetequipment (near end).
Yellow
FE Indicates an alarm condition exists remotefrom the shelf (far end).
Yellow
Notes:
1. All LEDs light momentarily (~5 s) during first power-up.
2. All the LEDs of the standby COMDAC are off.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the COMDAC COM501 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
COMDAC 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for narrowband services Common data and control (COMDAC)COM501/COM501B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-5
LAG common data and control (COMDAC)COM503/COM503B...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The line access gateway common data and control (LAG COMDAC) COM503provides the central control and transmission fabric for theAnyMedia® LAG 1900Shelf. The LAG COMDAC COM503 is also supported in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5Shelf.
Features and functions
The LAG COM503 supports the following features and functions:
• Provides a full-access timeslot interchange (TSI)
• Supports 128 (8 bit bidirectional) timeslots per AP slot
• Supports up to 14 application packs (APs) in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf andup to 16 application packs (APs) in theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports remote and local management interfaces
• Provides system timing derived from E1 link, station clock, digital office timingsupply (DOTS) E1 clock, composite clock, or from a DCS clock
• Supervise the ringing voltage on both sections of ringer bus 0
• Provides the microprocessor control complex
• Provides non-volatile data storage (NVDS) and non-volatile program storage(NVPS)
• Supports simplex and duplex operation.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109204768 (COM503), 109633834 (COM503B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM503 functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM503 faceplate.
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC)COM503/COM503B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-7
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC)COM503/COM503B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators (1 2) on the LAG COMDAC COM503 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition is detected on theCOMDAC and extinguishes when the fault condition clears
Lights if initial sanity check and/or inventory/program storechecksum failed
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz during packinitialization (built-in self-test) or waiting for softwaredownload
Flashes at a rate of approximately 2 Hz during softwaredownload.
Red
ACTIVE Indicates COMDAC is in-service. Green
CR Lit when a critical alarm is detected in the system. Red
MJ Lit when a major alarm is detected in the system. Red
MN Lit when a minor alarm is detected in the system. Yellow
NE Indicates an alarm or abnormal condition exists at the shelfor at the associated cabinet equipment (near end).
Yellow
FE Indicates an alarm condition exists remote from the shelf(far end).
Yellow
Notes:
1. All LEDs light momentarily (~5 s) during first power-up.
2. All the LEDs of the standby COMDAC are off
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LAG COMDAC COM503 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
COMDAC 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC)COM503/COM503B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-9
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The line access gateway common data and control (LAG COMDAC) COM520 is afurther development of the TDM COMDAC COM501. It provides the central controland transmission fabric for theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.
Features and functions
The COM520 supports the following features and functions:
• Provides a full-access timeslot interchange (TSI)
• Supports up to 43 application packs (APs)
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports remote and local management interfaces
• Provides system timing derived from E1 link, station clock, or from a digital officetiming supply (DOTS) E1 clock
• Provides the microprocessor control complex
• Provides non-volatile data storage (NVDS) and non-volatile program storage(NVPS)
• Supports simplex and duplex operation.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109291450.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM520 functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM520 faceplate.
LAG COMDAC
ApplicationPacks
CIU
ProcessorMemory &
ControlComplex
Full AccessTSI for
Call Processing
System Timing
TransmissionBandwidth
Communicationsand Control
TransmissionBandwidth
Communicationsand Control
External OS & CommunicationInterfaces
Power Module
+3.3V
Communicationsand Control
IO_E1
Digital office timing supply (DOTS) E1 clock
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-11
RT
H44
55A
AB
FAULT
FE
ACTIVE
CR
MJ
MN
NE
LED
COM520COMDAC
n:mLucent
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators (1 2) on the LAG COMDAC COM520 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition is detected on theCOMDAC and extinguishes when the fault condition clears
Lights if initial sanity check and/or inventory/program storechecksum failed
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz during packinitialization (built-in self-test) or waiting for softwaredownload
Flashes at a rate of approximately 2 Hz during softwaredownload.
Red
ACTIVE Indicates COMDAC is in-service. Green
CR Lit when a critical alarm is detected in the system. Red
MJ Lit when a major alarm is detected in the system. Red
MN Lit when a minor alarm is detected in the system. Yellow
NE Indicates an alarm or abnormal condition exists at the shelfor at the associated cabinet equipment (near end).
Yellow
FE Indicates an alarm condition exists remote from the shelf(far end).
Yellow
Notes:
1. All LEDs light momentarily (~5 s) during first power-up.
2. All the LEDs of the standby COMDAC are off
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LAG COMDAC COM520 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
COMDAC 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM520
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-13
LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The line access gateway common data and control (LAG COMDAC) COM521provides the central control and transmission fabric for theAnyMedia® LAG 4300Shelf and supports composite and DCS clock.
Features and functions
The COM521 supports the following features and functions:
• Provides a full-access timeslot interchange (TSI)
• Supports up to 43 application packs (APs)
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports remote and local management interfaces
• Provides system timing derived from E1 link, station clock, digital office timingsupply (DOTS) E1 clock, composite clock, or from a DCS clock
• Provides the microprocessor control complex
• Provides non-volatile data storage (NVDS) and non-volatile program storage(NVPS)
• Supports simplex and duplex operation.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109554832.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM521 functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LAG COMDAC COM521 faceplate.
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-15
RT
H44
55A
AB
FAULT
FE
ACTIVE
CR
MJ
MN
NE
LED
COM521COMDAC
n:mLucent
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators (1 2) on the LAG COMDAC COM521 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition is detected on theCOMDAC and extinguishes when the fault condition clears
Lights if initial sanity check and/or inventory/program storechecksum failed
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz during packinitialization (built-in self-test) or waiting for softwaredownload
Flashes at a rate of approximately 2 Hz during softwaredownload.
Red
ACTIVE Indicates COMDAC is in-service. Green
CR Lit when a critical alarm is detected in the system. Red
MJ Lit when a major alarm is detected in the system. Red
MN Lit when a minor alarm is detected in the system. Yellow
NE Indicates an alarm or abnormal condition exists at the shelfor at the associated cabinet equipment (near end).
Yellow
FE Indicates an alarm condition exists remote from the shelf(far end).
Yellow
Notes:
1. All LEDs light momentarily (~5 s) during first power-up.
2. All the LEDs of the standby COMDAC are off
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LAG COMDAC COM521 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
COMDAC 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for narrowband services LAG common data and control (COMDAC) COM521
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-17
Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The communication interface unit (CIU) has no service-affecting functions but it isrequired for a lot of operations-related functions. Therefore its use is required in allAnyMedia® Access System applications.
Features and functions
The CIU:
• Supports craft and operations system interfaces
• Supports metallic test access for drop tests
• Provides storage of LAN media access control (MAC) address
• Provides a connection for station clock
• Provides drivers for the 10Base-T LAN to connect the GSI
• Provides a faceplate connectorCIT to connect the GSI
• Provides detectors for eight miscellaneous alarm inputsNote: DTP501 supports provisioning of alarm polarity and alarm integration timefor the miscellanous alarm inputs mc-1-1-8.
• Provides three office alarm relays
• Provides an alarm cutoff buttonACO to cut off the alarm indication via the threeoffice alarm relays
• Provides faceplate test jacksCHAN/MONandDROP
• Supports enhanced inventory
• Provides an LED test buttonLED TESTto support testing of pack LEDs
• Includes built-in self-tests (BISTs) and fault diagnostics.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108403197.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the CIU functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the CIU faceplate.
Test
ApplicationPacks
Processor Memory& Control Complex
+5V
Bus
Relay Matrixfor Test Support
Interface for GSI/EM
MiscellaneousAlarm Detectors
Power Module
Station Clock
Alarmoutput
Communicationsand Control
OAM&P Data
COMDAC
CIU
Common packs for narrowband services Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-19
LED
Button
DTP500n:m
Lucent
FAULT
CIT
DROPCHAN/MON
LED TEST
ACO
ACTIVE
POW 1
POW 2
TC
MISC
Common packs for narrowband services Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, buttons, connectors
LED indicators on the CIU faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack Red
ACTIVE Lit when pack is in operation Green
POW1 CIU in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf:
Lit when all power feeders from the range 1 to 4 are inoperation.
CIU in the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf/AnyMedia® 800 Shelfand in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:
Lit when -48V A power supply is in operation
Green
POW2 CIU in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf:
Lit when all power feeders from the range 5 to 8 are inoperation.
CIU in the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf/AnyMedia® 800 Shelfand in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf:
Lit when -48V B power supply is in operation
Green
TC Lit when metallic test access is provided at TAP-B interface Green
MISC Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous inputs is active Yellow
ACO Alarm cutoff reminder Green
Buttons on the CIU faceplate:
Button Function
ACO button Alarm cutoff button to retire the alarm indication of thethree office alarm relays
LED TEST button Causes allAnyMediaMainshelf LEDs to light temporarilywhen pressed
Connectors on the CIU faceplate:
Faceplatejacks/connectors
Function
CHAN/MON Provides full-splitting access to the channel side (towardthe Z ports of the APs); also provides bridging access(monitoring mode) to listen in to an existing call
DROP Provides full-splitting access to the drop side (toward thedrop and subscriber equipment)
Common packs for narrowband services Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-21
Faceplatejacks/connectors
Function
CIT Provides a connection for a PC GSI for administeringoperations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning(OAM&P).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the CIU in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
CIU 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Jumpers for configuring the station clock interface
The station clock interface on the CIU is a 2048 kHz synchronization interfaceaccording to ITU-T recommendation G.703. The synchronization clock can be providedto the backplane connector via coaxial pair cables with 75Ω resistive or viasymmetrical pair cables with 120Ω resistive.
By means of two jumpers on the CIU the station clock interface can be configured forboth cable types:
• Jumper MP4 on header P4 selects between 75Ω and 120Ω load resistance
• Jumper MP5 on header P5 selects between matched impedance (MI) and highimpedance (HI) load.
The following figure shows the location of the two jumpers on the CIU and in thetable the jumper settings for the different cable types are summarized.
Common packs for narrowband services Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Jumper settings for the different station clock configurations
Jumper MP4 Jumper MP5 Type of pair Resistive load impedance
120 HI symmetrical high impedance
(Default factory setting)
120 MI symmetrical 120Ω
75 MI coaxial 75Ω
(Screening of the cable will begrounded in the backplaneconnector)
MP4 MP5
Jumpers
Common packs for narrowband services Communication interface unit (CIU) DTP500/DTP501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-23
E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Each of the IO_E1 packs provides theAnyMedia® Access System with four E12-Mbps interfaces as service or protection pack. The IO_E1 packs are only used in anAnyMedia® Access System configuration with TDM COMDAC.
Features and functions
The IO_E1
• Provides four independent E1 interfaces
• Supports simplex and duplex COMDAC operation
• Provides transmit pulse shaping as defined in G.703
• Monitors the performance of the received E1 signals (error performance thresholds)
• Supports E1 physical layer functions according to G.703
• Extracts reference timing from received E1 signals, feeds reference clocks from twoof its inputs towards both COMDACs
• Provides E1 loopbacks
• Supports inventory data
• Includes built-in self-tests (BISTs) and fault diagnostics
• Includes a controller to handle OAM&P tasks for the E1s and the pack itself
• The FAC500B supports in addition ISDN PRA subscribers via V3 interface,unstructured leased line subscribers and IO_E1 pack protection.
The AnyMediaMainshelf allows equipage for up to four IO_E1 packs. These IO_E1packs are used allowing a maximum configuration of the 16 E1s. An additional slot(IO_E1P) is provided to support IO_E1 pack protection. For providing IO_E1 packprotection a FAC500B is required in the protection slot (IO_E1P).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109153254 (FAC500B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IO_E1 functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IO_E1 faceplate.
LEDs
LED indicators on the IO_E1 faceplate:
LED1 Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the pack
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz during packinitialization (built-in self-test).
Red
ACTIVE Lit when the pack is in operation for carrying service Green
UART
COMDAC
IO_E1
+5V
Communications and Control
Power Module
E1
E1
E1
E1
To E1
Facility
FAC500n:m
Lucent
FAULTACTIVE
1234
CLF LED
Common packs for narrowband services E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-25
LED1 Function Color
CLF1 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in-servicereceived E1 line #1
Flashes when an AIS alarm occurs on the E1 line #1
Yellow
CLF2 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in-servicereceived E1 line #2
Flashes when an AIS alarm occurs on the E1 line #2
Yellow
CLF3 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in-servicereceived E1 line #3
Flashes when an AIS alarm occurs on the E1 line #3
Yellow
CLF4 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in-servicereceived E1 line #4
Flashes when an AIS alarm occurs on the E1 line #4
Yellow
Notes:
1. During a restart of the pack all LEDs light for approximately 5 s.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IO_E1 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IO_E1 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Jumpers for selecting the interface impedance
There are jumpers on the IO_E1 pack for selecting the needed impedance of the E1interfaces: nine jumpers on an IO_E1 pack with interchangeability code below S1:8and five jumpers on an IO_E1 pack with interchangeability code S1:8 and higher. It ispossible to select an interface impedance of 120Ω or 75 Ω: 120 Ω for a symmetricalcable, 75Ω for a coaxial cable. All jumpers on one IO_E1 pack must be set to thesame setting (either 120Ω or 75 Ω) according to the E1 cable used. The defaultdelivery setting is 120Ω.
The headers have three pins. If the jumpers are installed between
• Position 1-2 75Ω interface impedance is selected
• Position 2-3 120Ω interface impedance is selected.
Common packs for narrowband services E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
The following figures show the E1 jumper settings for 120Ω (symmetrical cable).
E1 jumper settings for 120Ω on IO_E1 packs with interchangeability code belowS1:8.
E1 jumper settings for 120Ω on IO_E1 packs with interchangeability code S1:8 andhigher.
View of IO_E1 components side, faceplate to the right
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
75 Ω 120 Ω
View of IO_E1 components side, faceplate to the right
1 3
1 3
13
2
2
21
32
13 2
75 Ω 120 Ω75 Ω120 Ω
75Ω
120
Ω75
Ω12
0Ω
Common packs for narrowband services E1 interface unit (IO_E1) FAC500/FAC500B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-27
High level data link control (IO_HDLC) IDC500/IDC500B...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The high level data link control pack (IO_HDLC) frame relays V5 interfacecommunication channels and D-channel messages of ISDN subscribers. The 1N-sizedIO_HDLC providing this frame relay functionality is optionally 1:1 protected. AnIO_HDLC is required if switched ISDN D-channels have to be supported. If noswitched ISDN services need to be handled, that is, in POTS-only configurations, V5communication channels are connected via the TSI directly to the COMDAC wherethey are terminated.
Features and functions
The IO_HDLC:
• Performs the following main tasks:
– In the LE to ANE direction frames received from the LE on a certaincommunication channel are to be discriminated according to their informationtype (ISDN D-channel data or V5 Layer 3 protocols) and sent either to theCOMDAC or to the ISDN user port concerned.
– In the ANE to LE direction frames of both types (ISDN D-channel data or V5Layer 3 protocols) either received from the COMDAC or from ISDN ports aremultiplexed into the communication channel which is provisioned for the frametype concerned.
• Physically supplies HDLC terminations:
– Up to 256 for D16-channels (16 kbps) or 64 for D64-channels (64 kbps) or amixture between both
– 48 for V5 CCs (64 kbps)
• Supports inventory data
• Includes built-in self-tests (BISTs) and fault diagnostics
• Supports protection switching, it two packs are equipped.
The AnyMediaMainshelf allows equipage for up to two IO_HDLC. If two packs areequipped, one is the protection pack.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108644402 (IDC500B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IO_HDLC functional block diagram.
Common packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IO_HDLC faceplate.
LEDs
LED indicators on the IO_HDLC faceplate:
LED (1) Function Color
FAULT (2) Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the pack
Red
ACTIVE Lit when the pack is the active IO_HDLC,responsible for carrying service. On thestandby IO_HDLC the LED does not light.
Green
4 Mbps
UART
COMDAC
IO_HDLC
+5VHDLC Controller
Power Module
Communications and Control
Memory
2
IDC500n:m
Lucent
FAULTACTIVE
LED
Common packs for narrowband services High level data link control (IO_HDLC) IDC500/IDC500B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
3-29
Notes:
1. During a restart of the pack both LEDs light for approximately 5 s.
2. The FAULT LED does not flash during the built-in self test because all tests arecompleted within a very short time.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IO_HDLC in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IO_HDLC 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for narrowband services High level data link control (IO_HDLC) IDC500/IDC500B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4 4Common packs for ATM xDSLservices
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the common packs for ATM xDSL services which are used inthe AnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longer orderable) 4-2
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901 4-6
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longer orderable) 4-11
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911 4-15
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920 4-20
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941 4-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-1
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFMDS3 LPA900 provides an electrical DS3/ATM feeder facility interface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services with 44.736 Mbps. The DS3 may beterminated directly at an ATM network, or the DS3 may be transported over a SONETtransmission system such as a DDM-2000 system.
The AFMDS3 LPA900 serves as the common control and feeder interface unit forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. The AFMDS3 LPA900multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the DS3 feeder and the subscribersthrough the ATM xDSL APs.
This AFM type is used only in the slot marked AP-16.
Important! If this AP shall be used for duplex AFM operation mode, the softwarecompatibility should be checked by the local customer team before.
Important! The AFMDS3 LPA900 is not supported from release R1.25 onwards.
Features and functions
The AFMDS3 provides the following features and functions:
• DS3 interface according to ANSI T1.107 and GR-499
• ATM functionality via a standard DS3/ATM user network interface (UNI 3.1/4.0)to the ATM backbone network (direct cell mapping or physical layer convergenceprotocol (PLCP))
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the ATM xDSL application pack
• Daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems over a second DS3 interface toincrease the utilization of the DS3 interface to the ATM backbone network
• Two DS3 ports:
– DS3-1 for connecting to the ATM backbone network - composed of a transmit(TX-1) and receive (RX-1) connection
– DS3-2 for connecting to anotherAnyMedia® Access System - comprising atransmit (TX-2) and receive (RX-2) connection.
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3)
• Provides remote operations using SNMP via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3)
– BB ATM Operations Channel carrying management information.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC via a UART link to create acomplete and consistent view of the GSI.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• Capacity for up to 1000 VC connections per VP.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108108275.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA900 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA900 faceplate.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-3
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the AFMDS3 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTV Lit when AFMDS3 is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Lit when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarmcondition is detected.
Red
MN Lit when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Yellow
CLF1 Lit when a DS3 port 1 receive carrier line failureis detected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarmis received or when the DS3 is in loopback.
Yellow
CLF2 Lit when a DS3 port 2 receive carrier line failureis detected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarmis received. Off when DS3 port 2 is disabled.
Yellow
Connectors on the AFMDS3 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
TX-1 75 Ω coax, BNC DS3 interface 1
RX-1
TX-2 75 Ω coax, BNC DS3 interface 2
RX-2
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFMDS3 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFMDS3 LPA900 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA900 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-5
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFMDS3 LPA901 provides an electrical DS3/ATM feeder facility interface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services with 44.736 Mbps. The DS3 may beterminated directly at an ATM network, or the DS3 may be transported over a SONETtransmission system such as a DDM-2000 system.
The AFMDS3 LPA901 serves as the common control and feeder interface unit forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. The AFMDS3 LPA901multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the DS3 feeder and the subscribersthrough the ATM xDSL APs.
This AFM can be used in either simplex or duplex mode.
In simplex mode, the AFMDS3 LPA901 is used only in the slot marked AP-16. Induplex mode, one AFMDS3 LPA901 is installed in the slot marked AP-16, the other isused in the slot marked AP-15.
Features and functions
The AFMDS3 LPA901 provides the following features and functions:
• DS3 interface according to ANSI T1.107 and GR-499
• ATM functionality via a standard DS3/ATM user network interface (UNI3.1/4.0)to the ATM backbone network (direct cell mapping or physical layer convergenceprotocol (PLCP))
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the ATM xDSL application pack
• Simplex or duplex operation. Duplex operation provides increased reliability.
• Daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems over a second DS3 interface toincrease the utilization of the DS3 interface to the ATM backbone network
• Two DS3 ports:
– DS3-1 for connecting to the ATM backbone network - composed of a transmit(TX-1) and receive (RX-1) connection
– DS3-2 for connecting to anotherAnyMedia® Access System - comprising atransmit (TX-2) and receive (RX-2) connection.
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3).
• Provides remote operations using SNMP via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMDS3)
– BB ATM Operations Channel carrying management information.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view of the GSI
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• Capacity for up to 5500 VC connections per VP.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108875097.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA901 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA901 faceplate.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-7
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the AFMDS3 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack.
Flashes steadily during pack initialization (built-in self-test).
Flashes (3 short flashes followed by a pause)
when an AFM provisioned for simplex mode is alreadyinstalled in slot AP-16, and then another AFM is installed inslot AP-15, regardless of which mode the latter AFM isprovisioned for when an AFM is installed in slot AP-15 andthat AFM is provisioned for simplex mode when the AFM isinstalled in a non-AFM slot (that is, when not installed in slotAP-15 or AP-16).
In duplex mode only, the LED of the standby pack flashesunder the following conditions (3 short flashes followed by apause):
when there is a standby AFM that is of a different type thanthe active AFM when the current program images of the activeAFM and the standby AFM do not match when plannedprotection switching is inhibited.
Red
ACTV Lit when pack is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Lit when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Red
MN Lit when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition is detected. Yellow
CLF1 Lit when a DS3 port 1 receive carrier line failure is detected.Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm is received or when theDS3 is in loopback.
Yellow
CLF2 Lit when a DS3 port 2 receive carrier line failure is detected.Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm is received. Off whenDS3 port 2 is disabled.
Yellow
Connectors on the AFMDS3 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
TX-1 75 Ω coax, BNC DS3 interface 1
RX-1
TX-2 75 Ω coax, BNC DS3 interface 2
RX-2
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-9
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFMDS3 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFMDS3 LPA901 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMDS3 LPA901
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFME3 LPA910 provides an electrical E3/ATM feeder facility interface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services with 34.368 Mbps. The E3 may beterminated directly at an ATM network, or the E3 may be transported over an SDHtransmission system.
The AFME3 serves as the common control and feeder interface unit for theAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. The AFME3multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the E3 feeder and the subscribersthrough the xDSL APs.
This AFM type is used only in the slot marked AP-16.
Important! If this AP shall be used for duplex AFM operation mode, the softwarecompatibility should be checked by the local customer team before.
Important! The AFME3 LPA910 is not supported from release R1.25 onwards.
Features and functions
The AFME3 provides the following features and functions:
• E3 interface according to G.703 and G.832
• ATM functionality via a standard E3/ATM user network interface (UNI 3.1/4.0) tothe ATM backbone network (direct cell mapping)
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the xDSL application pack
• Daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems over a second E3 interface toincrease the utilization of the E3 interface to the ATM backbone network
• Two E3 ports:
– E3-1 for connecting to the ATM backbone network - composed of a transmit(TX-1) and receive (RX-1) connection
– E3-2 for connecting to anotherAnyMedia® Access System - comprising atransmit (TX-2) and receive (RX-2) connection.
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
• Provides remote operations using SNMP via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
– BB ATM Operations Channel.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view of the GSI
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-11
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• Capacity for up to 1000 VC connections per VP.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108348251.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA910 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA910 faceplate:.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-13
LEDs
LED indicators on the AFME3 faceplate
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
ACTV Lit when AFME3 LPA910 is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Lit when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm conditionis detected.
Red
MN Lit when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Yellow
CLF1 Lit when an E3 port 1 receive carrier line failure isdetected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm isreceived or when the E3 is in loopback.
Yellow
CLF2 Lit when an E3 port 2 receive carrier line failure isdetected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm isreceived. Off when E3 port 2 is disabled.
Yellow
Connectors on the AFME3 faceplate
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
TX-1 75 Ω coax, BNC E3 interface 1
RX-1
TX-2 75 Ω coax, BNC E3 interface 2
RX-2
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFME3 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFME3 LPA910 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA910 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFME3 LPA911 provides an electrical E3/ATM feeder facility interface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services with 34.368 Mbps. The E3 may beterminated directly at an ATM network, or the E3 may be transported over an SDHtransmission system.
The AFME3 serves as the common control and feeder interface unit for theAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. The AFME3 LPA911multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the E3 feeder and the subscribersthrough the xDSL APs.
This AFM can be used in either simplex or duplex mode.
In simplex mode, the AFME3 LPA911 is used only in the slot marked AP-16. Induplex mode, one AFME3 LPA911 is installed in the slot marked AP-16, the other isused in the slot marked AP-15.
Features and functions
The AFME3 provides the following features and functions:
• E3 interface according to G.703 and G.832
• ATM functionality via a standard E3/ATM user network interface (UNI 3.1/4.0) tothe ATM backbone network (direct cell mapping)
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the xDSL application pack
• Simplex or duplex operation. Duplex operation provides increased reliability.
• Daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems over a second E3 interface toincrease the utilization of the E3 interface to the ATM backbone network
• Two E3 ports:
– E3-1 for connecting to the ATM backbone network - composed of a transmit(TX-1) and receive (RX-1) connection
– E3-2 for connecting to anotherAnyMedia® Access System - comprising atransmit (TX-2) and receive (RX-2) connection.
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
• Provides remote operations using SNMP via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME3)
– BB ATM Operations Channel.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view of the GSI
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-15
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• Capacity for up to 5500 VC connections per VP.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108875105.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA911 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFMDS3 LPA911 faceplate.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-17
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the AFME3 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack.
Flashes steadily during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Flashes (3 short flashes followed by a pause)
when an AFM provisioned for simplex mode is alreadyinstalled in slot AP-16, and then another AFM is installedin slot AP-15, regardless of which mode the latter AFM isprovisioned for when an AFM is installed in slot AP-15 andthat AFM is provisioned for simplex mode when the AFMis installed in a non-AFM slot (that is, when not installedin slot AP-15 or AP-16).
In duplex mode only, the LED of the standby pack flashesunder the following conditions (3 short flashes followed bya pause):
when there is a standby AFM that is of a different typethan the active AFM when the current program images ofthe active AFM and the standby AFM do not match whenplanned protection switching is inhibited.
Red
ACTV Lit when pack is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Lit when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Red
MN Lit when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition is detected. Yellow
CLF1 Lit when an E3 port 1 receive carrier line failure isdetected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm is receivedor when the E3 is in loopback.
Yellow
CLF2 Lit when an E3 port 2 receive carrier line failure isdetected. Flashes when an AIS or minor alarm is received.Off when E3 port 2 is disabled.
Yellow
Connectors on the AFME3 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
TX-1 75 Ω coax, BNC E3 interface 1
RX-1
TX-2 75 Ω coax, BNC E3 interface 2
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Connector Type Function
RX-2
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFME3 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFME3 LPA911 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME3 LPA911
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-19
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFMO provides an optical STM-1/OC-3c ATM 155.52 Mbps feeder facilityinterface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. These interfaces meet therequirements of:
• ITU-T SDH/STM-1 for international applications
• SONET/OC-3c for North American applications
• ITU-JT/STM-1 for Japanese applications.
This AFM can be used in either simplex or duplex mode.
The STM-1/OC-3c may be terminated directly at an ATM network, or theSTM-1/OC-3c may be transported over an SDH or a SONET transmission system. TheAFMO serves as the common control and feeder interface unit forAnyMediaAccessSystem ATM xDSL services. The AFMO multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells betweenthe STM-1/OC-3c feeder and the subscribers through the ATM xDSL APs.
In simplex mode, the AFMO is used only in the slot marked AP-16/AFM. In duplexmode, an additional AFMO is installed in the slot marked AP-16/AFM. The otherAFMO is used in the slot marked AP-15, and both packs are joined with a 995Across-coupling faceplate connector.
Features and functions
The AFMO provides the following features and functions:
• ATM feeder interface
– STM-1/OC-3c physical interface according to SDH/SONET standard ITU-TG.707, G.783/GR-253 to the network
– ATM functionality via UNI 3.1/4.0 standard interface based on STM-1/OC-3cphysical interface (ATM cell mapping into STS-3c SPE)
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the ATM xDSL APs
• Simplex or duplex operation. Duplex operation provides increased reliability
• Provides STM-1/OC-3c feeder facility protection when AFM used in duplex mode.
• Daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems over a second STM-1/OC-3cinterface to increase the utilization of the STM-1/OC-3c interface to the ATMbackbone network
• Two STM-1/OC-3c ports:
– STM-1/OC-3c for connecting toward the ATM backbone network (upper duplexSC connector) - composed of a transmit (TX-1) connection and receive (RX-1)connection
– STM-1/OC-3c for connecting to anotherAnyMedia® Access System (lowerduplex SC connector) - comprising a transmit (TX-2) connection and receive(RX-2) connection.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFMO)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMO)
• Provides remote operations using SNMP protocol via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFMO)
– BB ATM Operations Channel.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view of the GSI
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• Capacity for up to 5500 VC connections per VP.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109263830 (LPA920B), 109606020 (LPA920C).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFMO functional block diagram.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-21
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFMO faceplate.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the AFMO faceplate:
LED Function Color
FLT Is off when the pack is operational.
Lit when a fault is detected on a circuit pack.
Flashes (3 short flashes followed by a pause)
when an AFM provisioned for simplex mode is alreadyinstalled in slot AP-16, and then another AFM is installed inslot AP-15, regardless of which mode the latter AFM isprovisioned for when an AFM is installed in slot AP-15 andthat AFM is provisioned for simplex mode when the AFM isinstalled in a non-AFM slot (that is, when not installed in slotAP-15 or AP-16).
In duplex mode only, the LED of the standby pack flashesunder the following conditions (3 short flashes followed by apause):
when there is a standby AFM that is of a different type thanthe active AFM when the current program images of the activeAFM and the standby AFM do not match when plannedprotection switching is inhibited.
Red
ACTV Lit when the pack is in operation. Green
ALM Is off when no alarms are pending.
Lit red when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Lit yellow when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Red/ yellow
FAC1 Is off when the STM-1/OC-3c port 1 facility is out of service.
Lit green when the STM-1/OC-3c port 1 facility is okay.
Lit yellow when an STM-1/OC-3c port 1 near end error isdetected (for example LOS).
Flashes yellow to indicate an STM-1/OC-3c port 1 far enderror (for example AIS) or when the STM-1/OC-3c is inloopback.
Green/yellow
FAC2 Is off when the STM-1/OC-3c port 2 facility is out of service
Lit green when the STM-1/OC-3c port 2 facility is okay.
Lit yellow when an STM-1/OC-3c port 2 near end error isdetected (for example LOS), or when there are multiple alarmconditions that would require this LED to show continuousyellow and yellow blinking simultaneously.
Flashes yellow to indicate an STM-1/OC-3c port 2 far enderror (for example AIS).
Green/yellow
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-23
Connectors on the AFMO faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
TX-1 Duplex SCconnector
STM-1/OC-3c interface 1
RX-1
TX-2 Duplex SCconnector
STM-1/OC-3c interface 2
RX-2
CROSS COUPLE 40-pin microstripconnector
Transfer of transmission data between theactive and standby packs (duplex modeonly
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFMO in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFMO 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFMO LPA920
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFME1 LPA941 provides a multiple E1/ATM feeder facility interface forAnyMedia® Access System ATM xDSL services. The eight E1 feeders may beconnected over E1 facilities to the ATM network, or they may be transported over anSDH transmission system. The AFME1 LPA941 serves as the common control andfeeder interface unit forAnyMediaAccess System ATM xDSL services. The AFME1LPA941 multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the E1 feeders and thesubscribers through the ATM xDSL APs.
The AFME1 LPA941 is used only in the slot marked AP-16.
Features and functions
The AFME1 LPA941 provides the following features and functions:
• Conversion of an ATM signal which is dispersed across a set of E1 feeders into anATM signal on a single circuit within the AFME1
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing of ATM cells between the ATM feeder interface andthe xDSL subscriber ports on the ATM xDSL APs
• Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) as specified in AF-PHY-0086.001, limited touse of one group only
• Eight E1 connections for connecting toward the ATM network, which can be used
– to support from one to eight links as members ofone IMA group
– to connectone feeder for use in the non-IMA (that is UNI) mode
• Provides local operations using SNMP protocol via:
– Console port (on the faceplate of the AFME1 LPA941)
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME1 LPA941)
• Provides remote operations using SNMP via:
– 10Base-T LAN port (on the faceplate of the AFME1 LPA941)
– BB ATM Operations Channel.
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view for the GSI
• TCP/IP routing function for narrowband OAM&P information from BB ATMOperations Channel within ATM PVC to the AFM 10Base-T LAN port. This portcan be connected to the LAN connector in the SCP.
• E1 performance monitoring on all eight E1 ports
• IMA performance monitoring
• E1 local and remote line loopback.
• Capacity for up to 5500 VC connections per VP.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-25
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108694894.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the AFME1 LPA941 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the AFME1 LPA941 faceplate.
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
4-27
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the AFME1 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
ACTV Lit when AFME1 LPA941 is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Lit when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm condition isdetected.
Red
MN Lit when a minor ATM xDSL alarm condition is detected. Yellow
CLF Lit when an E1 carrier line failure (LOS, LOF, or HBER) isdetected on any feeder port. Flashes when an AIS or minoralarm is received or when the E1 is in loopback.
Yellow
Connectors on the AFME1 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
10BASE-T RJ-45 LAN OAM&P port
E1 37-pin D-sub E1 interface
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the AFME1 LPA941 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
AFME1 LPA941 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for ATM xDSL services ATM Feeder Multiplexer AFME1 LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5 5Common packs for IP-basedservices
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the common packs for IP-based services which are used in theAnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable) 5-2
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable) 5-7
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903 5-12
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904 5-17
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905 5-22
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906 5-27
IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960 5-32
ESIM LPE408 as controller 5-37
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-1
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI901 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching for theAnyMedia® AccessSystem and works in conjunction with application packs to provide VoIP, Ethernet andVDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI901 stores the configuration information in itsmemory devices for the APs and accesses those packs to change configurations andupgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI901 has an onboard processor and 2-switchfabric which have a bandwidth to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates up to9.6 Mpps for each switch.
LPI901 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX uplink interfaces via GBIC(Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 10/100Base-Tx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI901 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI901 supports the following features and functions:
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 41 application packs (APs)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI901 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX/LH) interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109549741.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI901 functional block diagram.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI901 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-3
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
CO
NS
OLE
LPI901
Lucent
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
100M
L/A
100M
L/A
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI901 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI901 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI901 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI901 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
100M Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI901 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX Gigabit Ethernet 1uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX Gigabit Ethernet 2uplink port
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-5
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI901 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI901 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI901 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI902 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching for theAnyMedia® AccessSystem and works in conjunction with application packs to provide VoIP, Ethernet andVDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI902 stores the configuration information in itsmemory devices for the APs and accesses those packs to change configurations andupgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI902 has an onboard processor and a switchfabric which has a bandwidth up to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates upto 9.6 Mpps.
The IPFM LPI902 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX uplink interfaces viaGBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 10/100Base-Tx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI902 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI902 supports the following features and functions:
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 19 APs (although in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 13 APs atmaximum are available for IP-based services)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI902 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX/LH) interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109549733.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI902 functional block diagram.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-7
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI902 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
CO
NS
OLE
LPI902
Lucent
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
100M
L/A
100M
L/A
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-9
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI902 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI902 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI902 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI902 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
100M Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI902 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX Gigabit Ethernet 1uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX Gigabit Ethernet 2uplink port
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI902 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI902 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI902 (no longer orderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-11
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI903 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching for theAnyMedia® AccessSystem and works in conjunction with application packs to provide VoIP, Ethernet andVDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI903 stores the configuration information in itsmemory devices for the APs and accesses those packs to change configurations andupgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI903 has an onboard processor and 2-switchfabric which have a bandwidth to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates up to9.6 Mpps for each switch.
The LPI903 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX/T uplink interfaces via GBIC(Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 10/100Base-Tx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI903 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI903 supports the following features and functions:
• 256 MB flash memory
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 41 application packs (APs)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI903 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX, T) interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109581223.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI903 functional block diagram.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI903 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-13
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
CO
NS
OLE
LPI903
Lucent
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
100M
L/A
100M
L/A
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI903 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI903 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI903 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI903 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
100M Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI903 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet1 uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet2 uplink port
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-15
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI903 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI903 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI903
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI904 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching and Layer-2 Ethernetswitching for theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with applicationpacks to provide VoIP, Ethernet and VDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI904 stores theconfiguration information in its memory devices for the APs and accesses those packsto change configurations and upgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI904 has an onboard processor and a switchfabric which has a bandwidth up to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates upto 9.6 Mpps.
The IPFM LPI904 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX/T uplink interfaces viaGBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 10/100Base-Tx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI904 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI904 supports the following features and functions:
• 256 MB flash memory
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 19 APs (although in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 13 APs atmaximum are available for IP-based services)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI904 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX, T) interfaces for Uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109581231.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-17
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI904 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI904 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
CO
NS
OLE
LPI904
Lucent
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
100M
L/A
100M
L/A
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-19
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI904 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI904 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI904 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI904 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
100M Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI904 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 Local console OAM&P port
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet1 uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet2 uplink port
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI904 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI904 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI904
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-21
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI905 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching for theAnyMedia® AccessSystem and works in conjunction with application packs to provide VoIP, Ethernet andVDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI905 stores the configuration information in itsmemory devices for the APs and accesses those packs to change configurations andupgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI905 has an onboard processor and 2-switchfabric which have a bandwidth to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates up to9.6 Mpps for each switch.
The LPI905 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX/T uplink interfaces via GBIC(Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 100Base-Fx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI905 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI905 supports the following features and functions:
• 256 MB flash memory
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 41 application packs (APs)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI905 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX, T) interfaces for uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109672113.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI905 functional block diagram.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI905 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-23
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
LPI905
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
RX
F2
F1
L/A
SP
D
RX
TX
TX
CO
NS
OLE
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI905 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI905 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI905 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI905 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
SPD Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI905 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 Local console OAM&P port to beused with a customer adapter cablewith USB-style connector(DB9-to-USB RS232, see “OrderingGuide” 363-211-144)
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 SFP 100Base-FX Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 SFP 100Base-FX Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-25
Connector Type Function
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet1 uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet2 uplink port
Important! Although the CONSOLE connector below the STANDBY LED lookslike a USB connector, it is not a USB connector. It will not work if a laptop isconnected, but attaching a true USB host or peripheral to this port may damage theUSB drivers of this device or the LPI905. Always use an adapter cable toCONSOLE port with USB-A connector (DB9-to-USB RS232).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI905 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI905 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI905
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM LPI906 provides Layer-3 IP packet switching for theAnyMedia® AccessSystem and works in conjunction with application packs to provide VoIP, Ethernet andVDSL services. Also, the IPFM LPI906 stores the configuration information in itsmemory devices for the APs and accesses those packs to change configurations andupgrade software.
For IP service applications the IPFM LPI906 has an onboard processor and a switchfabric which has a bandwidth up to 12.8 Gbps and enables packet forwarding rates upto 9.6 Mpps.
The IPFM LPI906 also provides external two 1000Base-SX/LX/T uplink interfaces viaGBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) module and two 100Base-Fx uplink interfaces.
The IPFM LPI906 is determined for use in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The IPFM LPI906 supports the following features and functions:
• 256 MB flash memory
• Provides 100Base-Tx downlinks to application packs (APs)
• Supports up to 19 APs (although in theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf 13 APs atmaximum are available for IP-based services)
• Supports 1 Fast Ethernet synchronization link which is connected with the mateLPI906 for redundancy
• Supports 2 Fast Ethernet Interfaces for uplinks
• Supports 2 GBIC (SX, LX, T) interfaces for uplinks
• Supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• Supports configuration backup and database restoration
• Supports external 10/100Base-Tx interface for remote management
• Supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• Inventory and status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109672121.
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-27
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI906 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPFM LPI906 faceplate.
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
FAULT
ACTIVE
STANDBY
MG
MT
LPI905
GB
IC1
GB
IC2
RX
TXR
XTX
G2
G1
LNK
TX RX
FE
1F
E2
LNK
TRF
RX
F2
F1
L/A
SP
D
RX
TX
TX
CO
NS
OLE
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-29
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPFM LPI906 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS FAULT Lights when an internal fault condition isdetected on the LPI906 and extinguishes whenthe fault condition clears.
Flashes during pack initialization (built-inself-test).
Red
ACTIVE Indicates IPFM LPI906 is in-service. Green
STANDBY Indicates IPFM LPI906 is in standby status. Orange
MGMT LNK Lights when a FE link is established. Green
TRF Blinks when a module transmits or receives apacket.
Green
FE
Uplink
L/A Lights when a FE link is established. Blinkswhen transmits/receives a packet.
Green
SPD Lights when a link speed is 100M and turnedoff when the speed is 10M.
Green
GBIC
Uplink
LNK Turn off when a GBIC module is inserted.
A green light is turned on when a link isestablished.
A yellow light is turned on when a GBICmodule is removed.
Green/yellow
TX Blinks when a module transmits a packet. Green
RX Blinks when a module receives a packet. Green
Connectors on the IPFM LPI906 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 Local console OAM&P port to beused with a customer adapter cablewith USB-style connector(DB9-to-USB RS232, see “OrderingGuide” 363-211-144)
MGMT RJ-45 10/100Base-Tx LAN OAM&P port
FE 1 SFP 100Base-Fx Fast Ethernet 1 uplinkport
FE 2 SFP 100Base-Fx Fast Ethernet 2 uplinkport
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Connector Type Function
GBIC 1 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet1 uplink port
GBIC 2 GBIC 1000Base-SX/LX/T Gigabit Ethernet2 uplink port
Important! Although the CONSOLE connector below the STANDBY LED lookslike a USB connector, it is not a USB connector. It will not work if a laptop isconnected, but attaching a true USB host or peripheral to this port may damage theUSB drivers of this device or the LPI906. Always use an adapter cable toCONSOLE port with USB-A connector (DB9-to-USB RS232).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPFM LPI906 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
IPFM LPI906 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP Feeder Multiplexer IPFM LPI906
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-31
IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IP-AFM is a controller pack used inAnyMedia® LAG Shelves and inAnyMedia®
ETSI V5 Shelves to convert ATM xDSL traffic into IP traffic and vice versa. TheIP-AFM implements a layer 2 bridge system where the subscriber ATM traffic isinterworked into Ethernet frames in the upstream direction. In the downstreamdirection, the Ethernet frames are segmented in ATM cells and transmitted to thesubscriber side. The ADSL portion of the IP-AFM is identical to the legacy AFMpacks. It supports all the xDSL APs which are supported by the AFMs.
Features and functions
The IP-AFM LPI960
• acts as a multiplexer between a Gigabit Ethernet Interface and ADSL APs,converting ATM cells into Ethernet packets and vice-versa
• supports four Gigabit Ethernet ports on the faceplate:
– one port is used as uplink to the IP network or in case of a daisy-chain asuplink to the host IP-AFM or the previous IP-AFM in a preceding shelf in thedaisy-chain
– one port is used to connect two IP-AFMs in duplex operation
– one port is used as downlink to the next IP-AFM in a succeeding shelf in caseof a daisy-chain
– one port is reserved for future use
• supports two Fast Ethernet ports on the faceplate which can be used
– as uplink to the IP network
– or to aggregate traffic from any other IP pack (for example ICAP) to theGigabit Ethernet uplink on the IP-AFM
• provides external RS-232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• provides external 10Base-T interface for local or remote management
• supports simplex or duplex operation; duplex operation provides increasedreliability
• supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• supports daisychaining betweenAnyMedia® Access Systems populated withIP-AFMs over one of the Gigabit Ethernet ports to increase the utilization of theATM traffic to the IP network
• supports configuration backup and database restoration
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-32 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
• interworks with the COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory andstatus to create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
•
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109555466.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IP-AFM LPI960 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IP-AFM LPI960 faceplate.
Backplane Side
LPI960
Faceplate Side
COMDACs(Optional duplex mode)- Communications and Control- System Timing
Control
Layer 2EthernetSwitch
-48V
4 GigabitEthernet
2 FastEthernet
ATM toEthernet
Converter
Gigabit MediaIndependent Interface
ATMSwitch
Backplaneinterface
(Cell Bus)
Utopia BusUtopia Bus
HostProcessor
Host Control Bus
EthernetConsole
RS-232Console
MiscellaneousPeripherals:Clocks etc.
Power Modules
+1.8V+1.5V +2.0V +3.3V
+2.5V +5.0V
Common packs for IP-based services IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-33
LPI960
Lucent
SF
P1
SF
P2
SF
P3
SF
P4
SFP1 SFP2
ACTV FLT
100
BA
SE-T
110
0B
ASE-T
010
BA
SE
-TC
ON
SO
LE
SFP3 SFP4
Red Fault LED
Console port (RS-232)
Console port (10 Base-T)
Green Active LED
SFP module GigabitEthernet port 2
LED GigabitEthernet port 2
LED GigabitEthernet port 3
SFP module GigabitEthernet port 3
SFP module GigabitEthernet port 4
LED GigabitEthernet port 4
Fast Ethernetport 1 (100Base-T)
Fast Ethernetport 2 (100Base-T)
Yellow Link active LEDsGreen Link up LEDs
SFP modules can be:1000Base-T1000Base-SX1000Base-LX
SFP module GigabitEthernet port 1
LED GigabitEthernet port 1
Common packs for IP-based services IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-34 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IP-AFM LPI960 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS ACTV Active
Lit when the IP-AFM is active.
Green
FLT Fault
Lit when a fault is detected on theIP-AFM.
Red
SFP1
SFP2
SFP3
SFP4
Active / Link up
Lit when the respective GigaBitEthernet port is established.
Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the port.
Green
Console port Active Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the Console port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when Console port is established. Green
FE1 Uplink Active Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when FE link is established. Green
FE2 Uplink Active Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when FE link is established. Green
Connectors on the IP-AFM LPI960 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 (1) Local console OAM&Pport.
10BASE-T RJ-45 High speed local consoleOAM&P port or remotelink.
100BASE-T 0 RJ-45 Fast Ethernet 1 uplink port
100BASE-T 1 RJ-45 Fast Ethernet 2 uplink port
SFP1 SFP module Gigabit Ethernet 1 uplinkport
SFP2 SFP module Gigabit Ethernet 2 uplinkport
Common packs for IP-based services IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-35
Connector Type Function
SFP3 SFP module Gigabit Ethernet 3 uplinkport
SFP4 SFP module Gigabit Ethernet 4 uplinkport
Notes:
1. The RS-232 serial interface uses an RJ-45 connector type.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IP-AFM LPI960 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPI960 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Common packs for IP-based services IP ATM Feeder Multiplexer (IP-AFM) LPI960
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-36 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ESIM LPE408 as controller...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
In LAG200 applications the ESIM LPE408 can work as a controller pack for two IPAPs. For the pack description refer to“ESIM application pack LPE408” (p. 9-28).
Common packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
5-37
6 6Application packs fornarrowband services
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the application packs for narrowband services which are used inthe AnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports) 6-2
ISDN application pack LPU132 (32 U Ports) 6-6
ISDN application pack LPU430 (16 U Ports) 6-9
ISDN application pack LPU432 (32 U Ports) 6-12
ISDN application pack LPU508 (8 U Ports) 6-15
POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longer orderable) 6-18
POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable) and LPZ12[x]B(32 Z Ports)
6-23
POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports) 6-29
POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports) 6-33
POTS application pack LPZ600 (VoIP AP) 6-38
POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports) 6-39
HDSL application pack (HDSL AP) LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 6-44
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510 6-49
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-1
ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPU112 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire U interface ISDN 2B1Q applicationpack which supports 12 digital subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPU112 application pack supports:
• 2-wire U interface
• 12 digital subscriber lines
• 2B1Q line coding
• Per line remote powering provisionable for NTU (on/off) (the managed networktermination unit (NTU) can be for example a FlexRate NTU).
• Per pack 32 W remote power
• Per line up to 4 W remote power
• Per line current limit 50 mA
• Remote feeding voltage range 91 V - 99 V.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108506387.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPU112 functional block diagram.
12 a/bPairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Digital LineInterface and
SignalingFunctions
LPU112
+5V
Control
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPU112 faceplate.
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPU112
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-3
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPU112 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the LPU112 AP connector:
Following figure shows the general pin assignment for a 32 port ISDN pack (forexample, LPU432). For the LPU112, only the ports 1 up to 12 are used.
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPU112 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPU112 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
ISDN U port 1
ISDN U port 2
ISDN U port 3
ISDN U port 4
ISDN U port 5
ISDN U port 6
ISDN U port 7
ISDN U port 8
ISDN U port 9
ISDN U port 10
ISDN U port 11
ISDN U port 12
ISDN U port 13
ISDN U port 14
ISDN U port 15
ISDN U port 16
ISDN U port 17
ISDN U port 18
ISDN U port 19
ISDN U port 20
ISDN U port 21
ISDN U port 22
ISDN U port 23
ISDN U port 24
ISDN U port 25
ISDN U port 26
ISDN U port 27
ISDN U port 28
ISDN U port 29
ISDN U port 30
ISDN U port 31
ISDN U port 323367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
For the ISDN AP
- only 12 U ports are usedLPU112
- only 16 U ports are usedLPU430
- only 8 U ports are used.LPU508
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached.
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU112 (12 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-5
ISDN application pack LPU132 (32 U Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPU132 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire U interface ISDN 2B1Q applicationpack which supports 32 digital subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPU132 application pack supports:
• 2-wire U interface
• 32 digital subscriber lines
• 2B1Q line coding
• Per line remote powering provisionable (on/off)
• Per pack 70 W remote power
• Per line up to 4 W remote power
• Per line current limit 50 mA
• Remote feeding voltage range 91 V - 99 V.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109494393.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPU132 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPU132 faceplate.
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPU132
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU132 (32 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-7
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPU132 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPU132 is the same as used for theother ISDN APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment”(p. 6-5).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPU132 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPU132 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU132 (32 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ISDN application pack LPU430 (16 U Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPU430 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire U interface ISDN 4B3T applicationpack which supports 16 digital subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPU430 application pack supports:
• 2-wire U interface
• 16 digital subscriber lines
• 4B3T line coding
• Per line remote powering provisionable (on/off)
• Per pack 70 W remote power
• Per line up to 4 W remote power
• Per line current limit 50 mA
• Remote feeding voltage range 91 V - 99 V.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109170621.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPU430 functional block diagram.
16 a/bPairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Digital LineInterface and
SignalingFunctions
LPU430
+5V
Control
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-9
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPU430 faceplate.
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPU430
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU430 (16 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPU430 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the application pack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz during packinitialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPU430 is the same as used for theother ISDN APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment”(p. 6-5).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPU430 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPU430 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU430 (16 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-11
ISDN application pack LPU432 (32 U Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPU432 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire U interface ISDN 4B3T applicationpack which supports 32 digital subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPU432 application pack supports:
• 2-wire U interface
• 32 digital subscriber lines
• 4B3T line coding
• Per line remote powering provisionable (on/off)
• Per pack 70 W remote power
• Per line up to 4 W remote power
• Per line current limit 50 mA
• Remote feeding voltage range 91 V - 99 V.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109494351.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPU432 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPU432 faceplate.
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPU432
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU432 (32 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-13
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPU432 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPU432 is the same as used for theother ISDN APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment”(p. 6-5).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPU432 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPU432 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU432 (32 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ISDN application pack LPU508 (8 U Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPU508 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire U interface ISDN TCM applicationpack which supports 8 digital subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPU508 application pack supports:
• 2-wire U interface
• 8 digital subscriber lines
• ISDN TCM line coding
• Reverse polarity feeding of subscriber line
• Call by call activation
• Per line remote powering
• Per line feeding current 39 mA ±10%.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109552083 (LPU508), 109600817 (LPU508B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPU508 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-15
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPU508 faceplate.
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU508 (8 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicator on the LPU508 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Connector on the LPU508 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
DCS IN RJ-45 Input port for external DCS clock
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPU508 is the same as used for theother ISDN APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment”(p. 6-5).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPU508 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPU508 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services ISDN application pack LPU508 (8 U Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-17
POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPP100 application pack (AP) supports 24 analog subscriber lines.
Features and functions
The LPP100 application pack supports:
• 24 subscriber lines for ALL and POTS services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• PCM encoding A-law, U-law (customer-specific)
• Reverse battery feeding including loop supervision
• Transmission only (no feeding, no signaling)
• Provisionable transmission and signaling
• Programmable termination impedance (customer-specific)
• Selectable DC current limit, 32 mA or 40 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Programmable per port, that is, on an LPP100 the services ALL and POTS areprovisionable for every Zport of the pack.
• Periodic pulse metering 12/16 kHz (customer-specific).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109129064 (LPP100B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPP100 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPP100 faceplate.
24 a/bPairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Analog LineInterface and
SignalingFunctions
LPP100
+5V
Control
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Ringing
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-19
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPP100Bn:m
Lucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPP100 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the LPP100 POTS connector:
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached.
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
Z port 1
Z port 2
Z port 3
Z port 4
Z port 5
Z port 6
Z port 7
Z port 8
Z port 9
Z port 10
Z port 11
Z port 12
Z port 13
Z port 14
Z port 15
Z port 16
Z port 17
Z port 18
Z port 19
Z port 20
Z port 21
Z port 22
Z port 23
Z port 24
Z port 25*
Z port 26*
Z port 27*
Z port 28*
Z port 29*
Z port 30*
Z port 31*
Z port 32*3367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
For the AP Periodic Pulse Metering
(LPP100B) only 24 Z ports are used.
The LPZ110 is equipped with 32low-pass filters (G.992 Annex A) for
Y-connecting to the ADSL32p AP (LPA432)with 32 high-pass filters (G.992 AnnexA).
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-21
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPP100 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPP100 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPP100 (24 Z Ports) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable) andLPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ100( ) application packs are 2-wire programmable POTS current feedapplication packs that support 32 analog subscriber lines. The table at the end of thissection compares country-specific versions of the LPZ100( ), the Zeus Series PacksLPZ120B, LPZ121B, LPZ122B, and LPZ123, to the LPZ100D and lists the differencesbetween them.
Features and functions
The LPZ100 application pack supports:
• 32 subscriber lines for ALL and POTS services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• PCM encoding A-law, U-law (customer-specific)
• Reverse battery feeding including loop supervision
• Transmission only (no feeding, no signaling)
• Provisionable transmission and signaling
• Programmable termination impedance (customer-specific)
• Selectable DC current limit, 27.5 mA or 42 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Programmable per pack, that is, on an LPZ100 the services ALL and POTS areprovisionable exclusively for the whole pack.
Important! Periodic pulse metering (12/16 kHz) is not possible with the LPZ100.If this feature is required later and the LPZ100 are to be replaced by LPP100 thesmaller line capacity of the pack has to be taken into consideration.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109257444 (LPZ100E), 108692971 (LPZ120B), 108692989 (LPZ121B),108692997 (LPZ122B), 109253625 (LPZ123).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPZ100 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-23
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPZ100 faceplate.
32 a/bPairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Analog LineInterface and
SignalingFunctions
LPZ100
+5V
Control
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Ringing
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable)and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPZ100
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable)and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-25
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPZ100 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the 32 ports a/b connector on the LPZ100 is the same as usedfor most POTS APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pinassignment” (p. 6-21).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPZ100 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ100 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Zeus Series Packs
A comparison of Zeus Series Packs with LPZ100D
Zeus Series Packs LPZ100
Market LPZ120B: China All
LPZ121B: Taiwan/ Brazil
LPZ122B: India/ Poland/ Rest
LPZ123: Mexico
Number of Lines 32 32
Codec per Line Yes Yes
Scan Feeding States Loop Start Loop Start, Ground Start
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable)and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Zeus Series Packs LPZ100
Talk Feeding States Normal battery- voltage potentialfrom a-wire (tip) to b-wire (ring)is -48 V
Normal Battery - Voltage Potentialfrom a-wire (tip) to b-wire (ring) is48 V
Reverse Battery - Voltage Potentialfrom a-wire (tip) to b-wire (ring) is+48 V
Analog Leased Line - Battery FeedDenial with Full TransmissionCapability
Testing feeding States Test out Only Test out, Test in and Test out, Bridge
Balance Network LPZ120B: 200Ω + 0.10 µF||680 Ω
Programmable on a Per-Line Basis
LPZ121B: 600 Ω
LPZ122B: 600 Ω
LPZ123: 220 Ω + 820 Ω ||0.115 µF
PCM Encoding A Law A law, u-law
TerminationImpedance
LPZ120B: 200 Ω 0.10 µF ||680 Ω
600 Ω; 600 Ω + 2.16 µF; 800Ω;900 Ω; 900 + 2.16 µF; 220Ω +820 Ω || 0.115 µF; 200Ω + 680 Ω ||0.1 µF; 270Ω + 750 Ω || 0.15 µF
LPZ121B: 900 Ω
LPZ122B: 600 Ω
LPZ123: 220 Ω + 820 Ω ||0.115 µF
DC Current Limit
Rx Gain
80 mA at 51.5V Battery
0, -3.5, -6.5 dB
SW selectable
Programmable at 43 mA, 27 mA(Low Power Mode), 0 mA (AnalogLeased Line)
+3 dBr to -12 dBr in 0.5 dB Steps
Lightning Protection K20, K17 Spec
1000V w/o External Prot
4000V with External Prot
Compliance to GR-1089 1998 Edition
Narrow/Broadband Yes Yes
Supported service POTS ALL and POTS
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable)and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-27
Zeus Series Packs LPZ100
Maximum LoopLength
LPZ120B: 1800Ω at -48 V and18 mA
1800 Ω at -48 V and 18 mA
LPZ121B: 2200Ω at -48 V and17 mA
LPZ122B: 2000Ω at -48 V and15 mA
LPZ123: 1800Ω at -48 V and18 mA
Detection Limit -Loop
LPZ120B: Offhook < 2200Ω
Onhook > 10000Ω
Offhook < 3200 Ω
Onhook > 4800Ω
LPZ121B: Offhook < 2000Ω
Onhook > 10000Ω
LPZ122B: Offhook < 2200Ω
Onhook > 20000Ω
LPZ123: Offhook < 2200Ω
Onhook > 10000Ω
Detection Limit -Ringing
Ring Trip < 2000 Ω
No Ring Trip > 10,000Ω
Ring Trip < 2000 Ω
No Ring Trip > 10,000Ω
Detection Limit -Fault
36 V +/-3 V at 300 Ω (Tip orRing)
35 V +/- 3 V at 300 Ω (Tip or Ring)
Ringing Conventions a-wire to ground, b-wire tobattery+ringing Signal(battery-backed ringing)
a-wire to ground, b-wire to battery+ringing signal (battery-backedringing) or
a-wire to battery, b-wire to ground +ringing signal (earth-backed ringing)
Pre-cut Support No Yes
Fault LED Yes Yes
PPM Features No Reverse Polarity PPM
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ100( ) (no longer orderable)and LPZ12[x]B (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ110 application pack (AP) is a 2-wire programmable POTS current feedapplication pack which supports 32 analog subscriber lines. The LPZ110 is equippedwith an onboard low pass filter to allow its use with the LPA432. The LPA432contains onboard high pass filters so that these circuits may be bridged with theLPZ110 AP circuits externally to provide a combined ADSL and POTS service.
For details on wiring methods when using the LPZ110 and ADSL32 AP, see thesection Engineering POTS + ADSL service with LPZ110 and LPA432 APs in theApplications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowband and ATM xDSL services.
Features and functions
The LPZ110 application pack supports:
• 32 subscriber lines for ALL and POTS services
• Low pass filter (G.992 Annex A) for Y-connecting to the high pass filters of theLPA432
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• PCM encoding A-law, U-law (customer-specific)
• Reverse battery feeding including loop supervision
• Transmission only (no feeding, no signaling)
• Provisionable transmission and signaling
• Programmable termination impedance (customer-specific)
• Selectable DC current limit, 27.5 mA or 42 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Programmable per pack, that is, on an LPZ110 the services ALL and POTS areprovisionable exclusively for the whole pack.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108886821.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPZ110 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-29
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPZ110 faceplate.
32 a/bPairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Analog LineInterface and
SignalingFunctions
LPZ110
+5V
Control
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Ringing
Low-passfilter
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPZ110
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
BUSY
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-31
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPZ110 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
BUSY Indicates at least one line is off-hook. Green
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the 32 ports a/b connector on the LPZ110 is the same as usedfor most POTS APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pinassignment” (p. 6-21).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPZ110 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ110 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ110 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-32 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ200 application pack is a 2-wire programmable POTS current feed applicationpacks that supports 32 analog subscriber lines. Additionally the LPZ200 supports droptesting, that is testing of the subscriber line. As the LPZ200 can be used for testing ofits own subscriber lines as well as testing of the subscriber lines of other applicationpacks in the same shelf, no further test application pack TAP10x is necessary for droptesting.
Features and functions
The LPZ200 application pack supports:
• 32 subscriber lines for ALL and POTS services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• PCM encoding A-law, U-law (customer-specific)
• Reverse battery feeding including loop supervision
• Transmission only (no feeding, no signaling)
• Provisionable transmission and signaling
• Programmable termination impedance (customer-specific)
• Selectable DC current limit, 27.5 mA or 42 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Programmable per port, that is, on an LPZ200 the services ALL and POTS areprovisionable for every Zport of the pack
• Periodic pulse metering 12/16 kHz (customer-specific)
• Dynamic time slot allocation at backplane
• Downloadable firmware and field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs)
• Line testing for the entire shelf on ports 15 and 31 whereas port 31 provides mostadvanced capabilities for this purpose
• Per port integrated metallic line testing capability supporting the measurement of
– All AC and DC foreign voltages of the a-wire and b-wire of a drop
– Feeding voltage measurement (POTS/ISDN APs)
– Insulation and loop resistance of the a/b-wire of a drop
– Capacitance of the a/b-wire of a drop
– Distance to open measurement for a specified drop
– Detection test of the test termination in the master line jack of the subscriber
– Draw and break dial tone test
– DTMF and pulse character test
– Sending a test tone for POTS CPE
– Noise measurement on a subscriber line
– Loop current measurement
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-33
– Tone measurement (additional test equipment at subscriber side needed)
– Quick line test
– Loop resistance measurement with additional detection of short circuit versusoff-hook condition
– Noise measurement with 15 kHz flat filter.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109450155.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPZ200 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPZ200 faceplate.
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-34 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-35
LEDs
LED indicators on the LPZ200 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Flashes at a rate of approximately 2 Hz duringfirmware download.
Red
BUSY Indicates at least one line is off-hook. Green
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the LPZ200 POTS connector:
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-36 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPZ200 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ200 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached.
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
Z port 1
Z port 2
Z port 3
Z port 4
Z port 5
Z port 6
Z port 7
Z port 8
Z port 9
Z port 10
Z port 11
Z port 12
Z port 13
Z port 14
Z port 15
Test port and/or Z port 16
Z port 17
Z port 18
Z port 19
Z port 20
Z port 21
Z port 22
Z port 23
Z port 24
Z port 25
Z port 26
Z port 27
Z port 28
Z port 29
Z port 30
Z port 31
Test port and/or Z port 323367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ200 (32 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-37
POTS application pack LPZ600 (VoIP AP)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ600 is hardware-ready to support TDM based narrowband services as well asIP-based telephony. For the pack description refer to“POTS application pack (VoIPAP) LPZ600” (p. 9-7).
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-38 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ640 and LPZ641 application packs are 2-wire programmable POTS currentfeed application packs that support 64 analog subscriber lines. The LPZ641 supports inaddition inward testing via test-in relays.
Features and functions
The LPZ640/LPZ641 application pack supports:
• 64 subscriber lines for POTS services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• PCM encoding A-law, U-law (customer-specific)
• Reverse battery feeding including loop supervision
• Provisionable transmission and signaling (provisionable RxGain/TxGain rangedepends on customer specific termination impedance)
• Programmable termination impedance (customer-specific)
• DC current limit 29 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Inward tests (only supported by LPZ641).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109497354 (LPZ640), 109542886 (LPZ641).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPZ640/LPZ641 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-39
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPZ640/LPZ641 faceplate.
64 a/b Pairs
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
Analog Line Interface and
Signaling Functions
LPZ640/LPZ641
+5V
Control
Power Module
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
Ringing
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-40 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-41
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPZ640/LPZ641 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment connector P1
Pin assignment of the LPZ640/LPZ641 connector P1:
Wiring side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Ring11
32
2
31BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
BL/W
BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
BL/W
Ring2
Ring3
Ring4
Ring5
Ring6
Ring7
Ring8
Ring9
Ring10
Ring11
Ring12
Ring13
Ring14
Ring15
Ring16
Ring17
Ring18
Ring19
Ring20
Ring22
Ring23
Ring24
Ring25
Ring26
Ring27
Ring28
Ring29
Ring30
Ring21
Ring31
Ring32
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
Tip1
Tip2
Tip3
Tip4
Tip5
Tip6
Tip7
Tip8
Tip9
Tip10
Tip11
Tip12
Tip13
Tip14
Tip15
Tip16
Tip17
Tip18
Tip19
Tip20
Tip22
Tip23
Tip24
Tip25
Tip26
Tip27
Tip28
Tip29
Tip30
Tip21
Tip31
Tip32
33
34
63
64
Bluebinder
Orangebinder
Orangebinder
Bluebinder
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-42 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Pin assignment connector P2
Pin assignment of the LPZ640/LPZ641 connector P2:
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPZ640/LPZ641 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ640/641 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Ring331
32
2
31BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
BL/W
BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
BL/W
Ring34
Ring35
Ring36
Ring37
Ring38
Ring39
Ring40
Ring41
Ring42
Ring43
Ring44
Ring45
Ring46
Ring47
Ring48
Ring49
Ring50
Ring51
Ring52
Ring54
Ring55
Ring56
Ring57
Ring58
Ring59
Ring60
Ring61
Ring62
Ring53
Ring63
Ring64
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
Tip33
Tip34
Tip35
Tip36
Tip37
Tip38
Tip39
Tip40
Tip41
Tip42
Tip43
Tip44
Tip45
Tip46
Tip47
Tip48
Tip49
Tip50
Tip51
Tip52
Tip54
Tip55
Tip56
Tip57
Tip58
Tip59
Tip60
Tip61
Tip62
Tip53
Tip63
Tip64
33
34
63
64
Greenbinder
Brownbinder
Brownbinder
Greenbinder
Application packs for narrowband services POTS application pack LPZ640/LPZ641 (64 Z Ports)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-43
HDSL application pack (HDSL AP) LPS501/LPS503/LPS504...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The HDSL application packs (HDSL AP) LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 include 2 × 2HDSL pairs to support HDSL interfaces. HDSL interfaces can be used to connect thefollowing:
• Integrated services digital network primary rate access (ISDN PRA) subscribers viaV5 interface (V5 ISDN PRA subscribers)
• N × 64 kbps digital leased lines via G.703 interface (GLL subscribers) (n= 1... 31)
• N × 64 kbps digital leased lines via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface (VLL subscribers)(n= 1... 31).
The HDSL AP LPS503 can be used to connect in addition to LPS501
• integrated services digital network primary rate access (ISDN PRA) subscribers viaV3 interface to the LE (V3 ISDN PRA subscribers).
The HDSL AP LPS504 can be used to connect in addition to LPS503
• unstructured 2 Mbps leased line subscribers via G.703 interface (UGLLsubscribers) and unstructured 2 Mbps leased line subscribers via V.35, V.36 or X.21interface (UVLL subscribers).
The customer output HDSL pairs are on pairs 1, 3, 5, and 7 on the faceplate connectorof the HDSL AP.
Features and functions
The HDSL APs LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 provide the following features and functions:
• 2B1Q line coding
• Transmission rate 1168 kbps per HDSL pair
• Sealing current provisionable (on/off)
• The following application modes are provisionable:
– Point-to-point modeBoth a/b pairs are used together for one HDSL interface (two dependent HDSLlinks).
– Single-pair mode (Fractional installation)Only one a/b pair is used for the HDSL interface. That means only half of the2-Mbps payload can be transported.
– Point-to-multipoint modeBoth a/b pairs are used for one HDSL interface (two independent HDSL links).To each HDSL link a network termination unit (NTU) located at differentcustomer premises can be connected.
• Transmission capability for payload 2 × 2 Mbps.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-44 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108905332 (LPS504).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the HDSL AP LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 functional blockdiagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the HDSL AP LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 faceplate.
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing
HDSL Module
HDSL AP
+5V
2 Mb Framer
Power Module
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
CIU- Test Access
-48V
HDSL Module
2 × 1168 kbpsControl
2 Mb Framer
2 × 1168 kbps
HDSL pair 1(a/b pair)HDSL pair 2(a/b pair)
HDSL pair 3(a/b pair)
HDSL pair 4(a/b pair)
Application packs for narrowband services HDSL application pack (HDSL AP)LPS501/LPS503/LPS504
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-45
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPS50x
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
CLF1
CLF2
CLF3
CLF4
Application packs for narrowband services HDSL application pack (HDSL AP)LPS501/LPS503/LPS504
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-46 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators on the HDSL AP LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
CLF1 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs onHDSL link 1
Flashes at a rate of approximately 4 Hz whena 2-Mbps payload failure (AIS, LOF, HBER,or RAI) is detected
Yellow
CLF2 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs onHDSL link 2
Yellow
CLF3 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs onHDSL link 3
Flashes at a rate of approximately 4 Hz whena 2-Mbps payload failure (AIS, LOF, HBER,or RAI) is detected
Yellow
CLF4 Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs onHDSL link 4
Yellow
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 AP connector:
Application packs for narrowband services HDSL application pack (HDSL AP)LPS501/LPS503/LPS504
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-47
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPS501/LPS503/LPS504 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPS501/LPS503/LPS504
3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
HDSL0 copper pair
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used3367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
HDSL1 copper pair
not used
HDSL2 copper pair
not used
HDSL3 copper pair
not used
For the HDSL AP only 4 HDSL copper
pairs are used. Each of them have a transport
rate of 1168 kbit/s. Two copper pairs can be
used in parallel for a bit rate of 2336 kbit/s
(HDSL0/HDSL1 pair or HDSL2/HDSL3 pair)
for HDSL port 4
for HDSL port 3
for HDSL port 2
for HDSL port 1
Application packs for narrowband services HDSL application pack (HDSL AP)LPS501/LPS503/LPS504
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-48 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510 includes eight SHDSL pairs tosupport SHDSL subscriber interfaces and four E1 ports. SHDSL interfaces can be usedto connect the following:
• Integrated services digital network primary rate access (ISDN PRA) subscribers viaV5 interface (V5 ISDN PRA subscribers)
• Integrated services digital network primary rate access (ISDN PRA) subscribers viaV3 interface (V3 ISDN PRA subscribers)
• N × 64 kbps digital leased lines via G.703 interface (GLL subscribers) (n= 1... 31)
• N × 64 kbps digital leased lines via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface (VLL subscribers)(n= 1... 31)
• Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines via IO_E1 and via AP_E1:
– via G.703 interface (UGLL subscribers)
– via V.35, V.36 or X.21 interface (UVLL subscribers).
Features and functions
The SHDSL AP LPS510 provides the following features and functions:
• TC-PAM line coding
• Transmission rate 192 kbps up to 2048 kbps per SHDSL port
• Sealing current provisionable (on/off)
• The following application modes are provisionable:
– Point-to-point single pair modeThe SHDSL pair is used for one SHDSL interface supporting multiple services(V5 ISDN PRA, VLL, GLL subscribers).
– V3 point-to-point single pair modeThe SHDSL pair is used for one SHDSL interface supporting one V3 ISDNPRA subscriber.
– Unstructured point-to-point single pair modeIn this mode the SHDSL AP is used to provide an unstructured 2 Mbps
service via the AP_E1 port or the IO_E1 port.
– Multi-rate single pair modeThe SHDSL pair is used for one SHDSL interface supporting VLL or GLLsubscribers.
• Eight SHDSL ports
• Up to four SHDSL ports may be cross-connected to the physical four E1 ports onthe SHDSL AP (AP_E1) for unstructured leased line services with clocktransparency
• The four AP_E1 ports may be used as remote terminal links in the host.The payload of the AP_E1 ports is transmitted between the backplane and theAP_E1 ports.
Application packs for narrowband services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-49
• The four AP_E1 ports can be used to provide V5 ISDN PRA subscribers.
• Transmission capability for payload 8 × 2 Mbps: 4 × 2 Mbps via backplane(IO_E1),4 × 2 Mbps via unstructured AP_E1.
Important! The AP_E1 ports can be used only for remote terminal interface or V5ISDN subscribers, if the associated SHDSL interface in not already in use.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108708835.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPS510 functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-50 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPS510 faceplate.
Application packs for narrowband services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-51
LED
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPS510
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
CONN2
Con
nect
or
CONN1
Application packs for narrowband services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-52 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicator on the LPS510 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Connectors on the LPS510 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONN1 68-pin connector 8 x SHDSL a/b pairs
CONN2 Amplimate 20 pin 4 x E1 transmit/receive pairs
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the LPS510 AP connector:
Application packs for narrowband services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
6-53
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPS510 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPS510 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
SHDSL1 copper pairnot used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used3367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
SHDSL2 copper pair
SHDSL3 copper pair
not used
SHDSL4 copper pair
not used
for SHDSL port 4
for SHDSL port 3
for SHDSL port 2
for SHDSL port 1
HDSL5 copper pair
not used
SHDSL6 copper pair
not used
SHDSL7 copper pair
not used
SHDSL8 copper pair
not used
for SHDSL port 8
for SHDSL port 7
for SHDSL port 6
Sfor SHDSL port 5
For the SHDSL AP only 8 SHDSL ports with 1
copper pair each are used. Each of them have a
transmission rate of 192 to 2048 kbit/s (line rate
up to 2064 baud).
to the unstructured E1 ports 1 to 4 until
other provisioning. For pinning of
By default SHDSL ports 5 to 8 are routed
these E1 ports see next figure.
not used
not used
Application packs for narrowband services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL AP) LPS510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-54 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7 7Application packs for ATMxDSL services
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the application packs for ATM xDSL services which are used inthe AnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longer orderable) 7-2
ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longer orderable) 7-6
ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longer orderable) 7-10
ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416 7-14
ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417 7-19
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420 7-24
ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432 7-28
ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434 7-33
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438 7-37
SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longer orderable) 7-41
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702 7-45
E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941 7-50
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-1
ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL8p LPA408 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and work in conjunction with a separate POTS AP toprovide POTS service. The ADSL8p LPA408 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers. The customer output ADSL and POTS pairs are on pairs 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11,13, and 15, and their associated input POTS pairs are on pairs 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14,and 16, respectively. a/b pairs 17 through 32 are not terminated.
Features and functions
The ADSL8p LPA408 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Eight ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board POTS splitters
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports and POTS input ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite.
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relay
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108550005.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL8p LPA408 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL8p LPA408 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL8p AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
ADSL and POTSsubscriber line
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
POTSSplitter
POTS a/b
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace 8
8
Test AccessRelay
Network
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-3
LPA408
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL8p LPA408 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL8p LPA408 are mm
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL8p LPA408 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL8p) LPA408 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-5
ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL4i LPA414 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with a separate ISDN AP toprovide ISDN service. The ADSL4i LPA414 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers (The subscriber’s modem must be compatible with ADSL over ISDN). Thecustomer output ADSL and ISDN pairs are on pairs 1, 3, 5, and 7, and their associatedinput ISDN pairs are on pairs 2, 4, 6, and 8, respectively. a/b pairs 9 through 32 arenot terminated.
Features and functions
The ADSL4i LPA414 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Four ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board ISDN splitters
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports and ISDN input ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Full-rate ADSL (ADSL-lite is not supported with this AP.)
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108610932.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL4i LPA414 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL4i LPA414 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL4i AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
ADSL over ISDNsubscriber line
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
ISDNSplitter
ISDNsubscriber line
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace 4
4
Test AccessRelay
Network
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-7
LPA414
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL4i LPA414 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL4i LPA414 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL4i LPA414 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL4i) LPA414 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-9
ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL4p LPA400 and ADSL 4p LPA400B APs provide subscriber interfaces forADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and work in conjunction with aseparate POTS AP to provide POTS service. The ADSL4p LPA400( ) APs, inconjunction with the AFM, multiplex/demultiplex ATM cells between the ATM feedernetwork and the subscribers. The customer output ADSL and POTS pairs are on pairs1, 3, 5, and 7, and their associated input POTS pairs are on pairs 2, 4, 6, and 8,respectively. a/b pairs 9 through 32 are not terminated.
Features and functions
The ADSL4p LPA400( ) APs provide the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Four ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board POTS splitters
• Support for UBR service class
• ADSL subscriber ports and POTS input ports on faceplate connector
• Discrete multitone (DMT)-based rate adaptive digital subscriber line (RADSL)transceivers for each subscriber port
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite (LPA400B only).
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer premises equipment modems.
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108603945 (LPA400B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL4p LPA400( ) AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL4p LPA400( ) AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL4p AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
ADSL sub-scriber line
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
POTSSplitter
POTS a/b
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace 4
4
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-11
RT
H44
55A
AB
LPA400
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
or
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL4p LPA400( ) AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL4p LPA400( ) in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL4p LPA400() 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL Application Pack (ADSL4p) LPA400( ) (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-13
ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL16p LPA416 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with a separate POTS AP toprovide POTS service. The ADSL16p LPA416 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers. The customer output ADSL and POTS pairs are on pairs 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11,13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, and 31, and their associated input POTS pairs are onpairs 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, and 32, respectively.
Features and functions
The ADSL16p LPA416 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Sixteen ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board POTS splitters
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports and POTS input ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite.
• Network timing reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413, ITU-TG.992.1 (G.dmt), and ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite)
• ATM cell transport
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relay
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC rack (J1C283B-1List1)equipped with a PFU500 with ADSL16p LPA416 or ADSL16i LPA417 APs: -Don’t equip more than a total of 11 ADSL16p LPA416 or ADSL16i LPA417 APsat a maximum perAnyMediaMainshelf because of the higher power consumption,or - Replace the PFU500 with a PFU501 and configure dual feeding instead ofredundant feeding (that means, remove the jumper on the PFU501).
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109121327.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL16p LPA416 AP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL16p LPA416 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL16p AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
ADSL and POTSsubscriber line
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
POTSSplitter
POTS a/b
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace Test Access
RelayNetwork
16
16
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-15
LPA416
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL16p LPA416 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the ADSL16p LPS416 AP connector:
Wiring side
The top pair (34 & 68)and bottom pair (1 & 35)are each shorted to alert thecircuit pack that the connectoris attached
3367
Short
68 34
Shot
236
35 1
means cabling from MDF switch sidemeans cabling to MDF subscriber side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Tip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BR/BK
BK/BR
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
ADSL port 1
Z port 1
ADSL port 2
Z port 2
ADSL port 3
Z port 3
ADSL port 4
Z port 4
ADSL port 9
Z port 9
ADSL port 10
Z port 10
ADSL port 11
Z port 11
ADSL port 12
Z port 12
ADSL port 13
Z port 13
ADSL port 14
Z port 14
ADSL port 15
Z port 15
ADSL port 16
Z port 16
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
ADSL port 5
Z port 5
ADSL port 6
Z port 6
ADSL port 7
Z port 7
ADSL port 8
Z port 8
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-17
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL16p LPS416 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL16p LPA416 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16p) LPA416
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL16i LPA417 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with a separate ISDN AP toprovide ISDN service. The ADSL16i LPA417 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers (the subscriber’s modem must be compatible with ADSL over ISDN). Thecustomer output ADSL and ISDN pairs are on the odd pairs between 1 and 31,inclusive, and their associated input ISDN pairs are on the even pairs between 2 and32, inclusive.
Features and functions
The ADSL16i LPA417 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Sixteen ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board ISDN splitters
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports and ISDN input ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Full-rate ADSL (ADSL- lite is not supported with this AP)
• Network Timing Reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413 and ITU-TG.992.1 (G.dmt)
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC rack (J1C283B-1List1)equipped with a PFU500 with ADSL16p LPA416, ADSL32 LPA432, or ADSL16iLPA417 APs: - Don’t equip more than a total of 11 ADSL16p LPA416, ADSL32LPA432, or ADSL16i LPA417 APs at a maximum perAnyMediaMainshelfbecause of the higher power consumption, or - Replace the PFU500 with a PFU501and configure dual feeding instead of redundant feeding (that means remove thejumper on the PFU501).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-19
Comcode: 108796343.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL16i LPA417 AP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL16i LPA417 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL16i AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
ADSL over ISDNsubscriber line
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
ISDNSplitter
ISDNsubscriber line
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace Test Access
RelayNetwork
16
16
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPA417
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-21
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL16i LPA417 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the ADSL16i LPA417 AP connector:
Wiring side
Tip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)and bottom pair (1 & 35)are each shorted to alert thecircuit pack that the connectoris attached
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BR/BK
BK/BR
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
ADSL port 1
ISDN port 1
ADSL port 2
ISDN port 2
ADSL port 3
ISDN port 3
ADSL port 4
ISDN port 4
ADSL port 9
ISDN port 9
ADSL port 10
ISDN port 10
ADSL port 11
ISDN port 11
ADSL port 12
ISDN port 12
ADSL port 13
ISDN port 13
ADSL port 14
ISDN port 14
ADSL port 15
ISDN port 15
ADSL port 16
ISDN port 16
BL/Y
Y/BL3367
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
means cabling from MDF switch sidemeans cabling to MDF subscriber side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
ADSL port 5
ISDN port 5
ADSL port 6
ISDN port 6
ADSL port 7
ISDN port 7
ADSL port 8
ISDN port 8
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL16i LPA417 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL16i LPA417 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL16i) LPA417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-23
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The (ADSL2_16p) LPA420 AP is an Annex A application pack that provides 16subscriber interfaces for ADSL2+ services on theAnyMedia® Access System and 16narrowband POTS splitters which meet the ANSI T1.413 requirements. The LPA420AP, in conjunction with the AFM, multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between theATM network feeder and the subscribers (the subscriber’s modem must be compatiblewith ADSL over POTS). The customer output ADSL2+ and POTS pairs are on pairs 1,3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, and 31, and their associated inputPOTS pairs are on pairs 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, and 32,respectively.
Features and functions
The LPA420 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Sixteen ADSL2+ subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• Supports ADSL standards ADSL (ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A), ADSL (ANSI T1.413),ADSL2 (ITU G.992.3 Annex A/M), READSL2 (ITU G.992.3 Annex L), andADSL2+ (ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A/M)
• Supports dual ended line tests (DELT)
• On-board splitter function for each line
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Full-rate ADSL2+
• Hardware ready to support Network Timing Reference (NTR) to ATU-R accordingto ANSI T1.413, ITU-T G.992.1, and ITU-T G.992.3
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC rack (J1C283B-1List1)equipped with a PFU500 with ADSL2_16p LPA420 APs replace the PFU500 witha PFU501 and configure dual feeding instead of redundant feeding (that means,remove the jumper on the PFU501).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109026575.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL2_16p LPA420 AP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL2_16p LPA420 AP faceplate.
ATMMux/Demux
BackplaneSide
FaceplateSide
Control
LPA420
ADSL and POTS
Subscriber Lines
POTSSubscriber Lines In
16
16
AFM
AT
MB
ackp
lan
eB
us
COMDACs(Duplex Mode)
Fuse Module
CTU
Test AccessRelay
NetworkATMFramer
ADSLTransceivers
POTSSplitters
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-25
FAULT
LPA420S1:1
LucentX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL2_16p LPA420 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the ADSL2_16p LPA420 is the same asused for the ADSL16p LPA416. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pinassignment” (p. 7-17).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL2_16p LPA420 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL2_16pLPA420
3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_16p) LPA420
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-27
ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL32p LPA432 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with the LPZ110 POTSZF AP toprovide POTS service. The ADSL32p LPA432 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers. The customer output ADSL pairs are on pairs 1 through 32.
This AP is equipped with an onboard high pass filter to allow its use with the POTSZFLPZ110. The POTSZF LPZ110 contains onboard low pass filters so that these circuitsmay be bridged with the LPA432 circuits externally to provide a combined ADSL andPOTS Service.
For details on wiring methods when using the LPZ110 and ADSL32p AP, see thesection Engineering POTS + ADSL service with LPZ110 and LPA432 APs in theApplications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowband and ATM xDSL services.
Features and functions
The ADSL32p LPA432 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Thirty two ADSL subscriber lines
• On-board high pass filters
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports and POTS ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite.
• Network timing reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413, ITU-TG.992.1 (G.dmt), and ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite)
• ATM cell transport
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relay
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view on the GSI.
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC rack (J1C283B-1List1)equipped with a PFU500 with ADSL32p LPA432 APs replace the PFU500 with aPFU501 and configure dual feeding instead of redundant feeding (that means,remove the jumper on the PFU501).
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108867573.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL32p LPA432 AP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL32p LPA432 AP faceplate.
CombinedADSL andPOTSservice
ATM CellMux/Demux
ADSL32p AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
HighPass
Filters
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace
Test AccessRelay
Network
32
•••
32 ADSLCustomerLines
POTSLines fromLPZ110
MDF orother
bridgingpoint
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-29
LPA432
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL32p LPA432 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the ADSL32p LPA432 AP connector:
Wiring side
The top pair (34 & 68)and bottom pair (1 & 35)are each shorted to alert thecircuit pack that the connectoris attached
3367
Short
68 34
Shot
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Orange binder
Tip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BR/BK
BK/BR
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
ADSL port 1
ADSL port 2
ADSL port 3
ADSL port 4
ADSL port 5
ADSL port 6
ADSL port 7
ADSL port 8
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
ADSL port 9
ADSL port 10
ADSL port 11
ADSL port 12
ADSL port 13
ADSL port 14
ADSL port 15
ADSL port 16
ADSL port 17
ADSL port 18
ADSL port 19
ADSL port 20
ADSL port 21
ADSL port 22
ADSL port 23
ADSL port 24
ADSL port 25
ADSL port 26
ADSL port 27
ADSL port 28
ADSL port 29
ADSL port 30
ADSL port 31
ADSL port 32
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-31
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL32p LPA432 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL32p LPA432 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32p) LPA432
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-32 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The ADSL32i LPA434 AP provides subscriber interfaces for ADSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with a separate ISDN AP toprovide ISDN service. The use of an external splitter is required. The ADSL32iLPA434 AP, in conjunction with the AFM, multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cellsbetween the ATM network feeder and the subscribers (the subscriber’s modem must becompatible with ADSL over ISDN). The customer output ADSL pairs are on pairs 1through 32.
Features and functions
The ADSL32i LPA434 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Thirty two ADSL subscriber ports
• On-board high pass filters
• Use of external splitters required
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Full-rate ADSL
• Network Timing Reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413 Issue 2Annex B and ITU-T G.992.1 Annex B
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109293449.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ADSL32i LPA434 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-33
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ADSL32i LPA434 AP faceplate.
ADSL overISDN sub-scriber lineATM Cell
Mux/Demux
ADSL32 i AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
Control
ATMFramer
ADSLTransceiver
HighPass
Filters
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace
Test AccessRelay
Network
32
•••
32 ADSLCustomerLines
ISDN sub-scriberlines
MDF orother
bridgingpoint
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-34 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPA434
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-35
LEDs
LED indicator on the ADSL32i LPA434 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the ADSL32i LPA434 is the same as usedfor the ADSL32p LPA432. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pinassignment” (p. 7-31).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ADSL32i LPA434 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL32i LPA434 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL32i) LPA434
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-36 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The (ADSL2_32i) LPA438 AP is an Annex B application pack that provides 32subscriber interfaces for ADSL2+ services on theAnyMedia® Access System andworks in conjunction with a separate ISDN AP to provide ISDN service. The use of anexternal splitter is required for ISDN service. The LPA438 AP, in conjunction with theAFM, multiplexes/demultiplexes ATM cells between the ATM network feeder and thesubscribers (the subscriber’s modem must be compatible with ADSL over ISDN). Thecustomer output ADSL2+ pairs are on pairs 1 through 32.
Features and functions
The LPA438 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to customer premises equipment (CPE)
• Thirty two ADSL2+ subscriber ports
• Supports ADSL standards ADSL2 (ITU-T G.992.3 Annex B) and ADSL2+ (ITU-TG.992.5 Annex B)
• Supports single ended line tests (SELT) and dual ended line tests (DELT)
• Supports radio frequency interference (RFI) notching
• Supports impulse noise protection (INP)
• Hardware prepared for G.998.1 ATM Bonding
• On-board high pass filters
• Use of external splitters required for ISDN service
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL2+ subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Full-rate ADSL2+
• Network Timing Reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413 Issue 2Annex B and ITU-T G.992.1 Annex B
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-37
Comcode: 109580738.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPA438 AP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPA438 AP faceplate.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-38 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-39
LEDs
LED indicator on the LPA438 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPA438 is the same as used for theLPA432. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment” (p. 7-31).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPA438 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPA438 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services ADSL application pack (ADSL2_32i) LPA438
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-40 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longerorderable)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The SDSL16 LPS716 AP provides subscriber interfaces for SDSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System. The SDSL16 LPS716 AP, in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes data between the ATM network interface and the subscribers.The customer output SDSL pairs are on pairs 1 through 16. a/b pairs 17 through 32 arenot terminated.
Features and functions
The SDSL16 LPS716 AP provides the following features and functions:
• ATM cell transport over 2B1Q-SDSL baseband line-coding with direct cellmapping
• Sixteen SDSL subscriber ports
• Support for 4 service classes. (The SDSL16 LPS716 AP can support all 4 serviceclasses, but can only be provisioned to support two of these at any given time.)
• Subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• SDSL symmetric rates from 144 kbps to 2.3 Mbps over a single twisted pair
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and CPE modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• The SDSL16 LPS716 AP provides 82.5Ω series resistances in the a-lead and inthe b-lead of its test bus.
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Important! The a/b-wires per SDSL16 LPS716 AP are qualified for intra-buildingexposure. If the pack is to be used with lines that exit building premises, thoselines must be protected by devices that provide primary protection.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108695529.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the SDSL16 LPS716 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-41
Faceplate
The following figure shows the SDSL16 LPS716 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
SDSL16 AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
16 SDSLsubscriber lines
Control
ATMFramer
SDSLTransceiver
AFM
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace
•••Test Access
RelayNetwork
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-42 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPA414
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-43
LEDs
LED indicator on the SDSL16 LPS716 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the SDSL16 LPS716 AP in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
SDSL16 LPS716 AP 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SDSL application pack (SDSL16) LPS716 (no longerorderable)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-44 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The SHDSL16 LPS702 AP provides subscriber interfaces for SHDSL services on theAnyMedia® Access System and works in conjunction with the AFM,multiplexes/demultiplexes data between the ATM network interface and the subscribers.The customer output SHDSL services are on pairs 1 through 16. a/b pairs 17 through32 are not terminated.
Features and functions
The SHDSL16 LPS702 AP provides the following features and functions:
• ATM cell transport over TC-PAM SHDSL line-coding
• Sixteen SHDSL subscriber ports
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR.
• Subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• SHDSL symmetric rates from 192 kbps to 2312 kbps over a single twisted pair(2-wire mode)
• SHDSL symmetric rates from 384 kbps to 4608 kbps over two bonded adjacenttwisted pairs (4-wire mode)
• 4-wire SHDSL mode allows payload rates twice of regular 2-wire SHDSL or longerdistances of up to 40% greater than 2-wire SHDSL
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and CPE modems
• Metallic line test access relays
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108902719.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the SHDSL16 LPS702 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-45
Faceplate
The following figure shows the SHDSL16 LPS702 AP faceplate.
ATM CellMux/Demux
SHDSL16 AP+5V
PowerModule
Faceplate SideBackplane Side
Broa
dban
dBu
s
SHDSL lines
Control
ATMFramer
SHDSLTransceiver
SHDSL 16 AP
Bac
kpla
neIn
terf
ace
Test AccessRelay
Network
16
AFM
SHDSL lines16
•••
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-46 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPS702
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-47
LEDs
LED indicator on the SHDSL16 LPS702 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the SHDSL16 LPS702 AP connector:
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
SHDSL1 copper pairnot used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used3367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
SHDSL2 copper pair
SHDSL3 copper pair
SHDSL4 copper pairfor SHDSL port 4
for SHDSL port 3
for SHDSL port 2
for SHDSL port 1
SHDSL5 copper pair
SHDSL6 copper pair
SHDSL7 copper pair
SHDSL8 copper pairfor SHDSL port 8
for SHDSL port 7
for SHDSL port 6
for SHDSL port 5
For the SHDSL16 AP only 16 SHDSL ports
with 1 copper pair each are used supporting
up to 2.3 Mbit/s brutto with 16 PAM line
coding.
SHDSL1 copper pair
SHDSL2 copper pair
SHDSL3 copper pair
SHDSL4 copper pairfor SHDSL port 12
for HDSL port 11
for SHDSL port 10
for SHDSL port 9
SHDSL5 copper pair
SHDSL6 copper pair
SHDSL7 copper pair
SHDSL8 copper pairfor HDSL port 16
for SHDSL port 15
for SHDSL port 14
for SHDSL port 13
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-48 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the SHDSL16 LPS702 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
SHDSL16 LPS702 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for ATM xDSL services SHDSL application pack (SHDSL16) LPS702
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-49
E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The E1-IMA AP LPA941 provides an E1 feeder facility interface consisting of up toeight E1 feeders. The E1-IMA AP LPA941 is located in an AP slot of a host shelf. Theeight E1 feeders are used to connect to an AFME1 in a cascaded shelf. The E1-IMALPA941 serves as a distribution pack to connect to the cascaded shelf.
The E1-IMA LPA941 can be used in any AP slot that is not a preferred AFM slot or anAFM protection slot.
Features and functions
The E1-IMA LPA941 provides the following features and functions:
• Upstream ATM cell transport to AFM
• Downstream ATM cell transport to AFME1 in cascaded shelf
• Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) as specified in AF-PHY-0086.001, limited touse of one group only
• Eight E1 connections for connecting towards a cascaded shelf, which can be used
– to support up to eight links as members ofone IMA group
– to connectone feeder for use in the non-IMA (that is UNI) mode
• Default setting is IMA group with one E1 link
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• Inventory and slot status is provided to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create acomplete and consistent view for the GSI
• Near end E1 performance monitoring on all eight E1 ports
• Near end IMA performance monitoring
• E1 line loopback (IMA group loopback and IMA looped test pattern handling is notsupported on the E1-IMA AP.)
• ATM backplane bus interface
• Capacity for up to 255 VP connections and up to 9216 VC connections via 9channelized VPs
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view of the shelf on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108694894.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-50 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the E1-IMA AP LPA941 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the E1-IMA AP LPA941 faceplate.
Application packs for ATM xDSL services E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-51
Application packs for ATM xDSL services E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-52 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the E1-IMA faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Flashes during software download and during packinitialization (built-in self-test).
Red
ACTV Lit when E1-IMA LPA941 is in operation. Green
CR-MJ Not used.
MN Not used.
CLF Lit when an E1 carrier line failure (LOS, LOF, orHBER) is detected on any feeder port. Flasheswhen an AIS or minor alarm is received or whenthe E1 is in loopback.
Yellow
Connectors on the E1-IMA faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE DB-9 For internal use only
10BASE-T RJ-45 For internal use only
E1 37-pin D-sub E1 interface
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the E1-IMA AP connector:
Application packs for ATM xDSL services E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
7-53
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the E1-IMA LPA941 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
E1-IMA LPA941 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Front view(contact side)
RE1D8R
RE1U8T
nc
RE1D7R
TE1U8T
TE1D8R
nc
TE1U6T
TE1D6R
TE1U7T
TE1D7R
TE1U4T
TE1D4R
TE1U5T
TE1D5R
TE1U2T
TE1D2R
TE1U3T
TE1D3R
TE1U1T
TE1D1R
RE1U6T
RE1D5R
RE1U7T
RE1D6R
RE1U5T
RE1D3R
RE1U3T
RE1D4R
RE1U4T
RE1D2R
RE1U1T
RE1U2T
RE1D1R
nc = not connected
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
11
7
8
9
10
6
1
2
3
4
5
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
20
21
nc
E1 port 4 (Tip)
E1 port 3 (Tip)
E1 port 2 (Tip)
E1 port 1 (Tip)
E1 port 4 (Ring)
E1 port 3 (Ring)
E1 port 2 (Ring)
E1 port 1 (Ring)
E1 port 8 (Tip)
E1 port 7 (Tip)
E1 port 6 (Tip)
E1 port 5 (Tip)
E1 port 8 (Ring)
E1 port 7 (Ring)
E1 port 6 (Ring)
E1 port 5 (Ring)
Application packs for ATM xDSL services E1-IMA Application pack E1-IMA AP LPA941
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-54 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8 8Application packs fornarrowband and ATM xDSLservices
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL serviceswhich are used in theAnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
Application pack (P32A32) LPA832 8-2
Application pack (P32A32) LPA833 8-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-1
Application pack (P32A32) LPA832...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The P32A32 LPA832 AP provides subscriber interfaces for POTS and ADSL serviceson theAnyMedia® Access System.
The P32A32 LPA832 AP combines POTS and ADSL (both full-rate and lite) functionson all 32 pairs. Both POTS and ADSL signals are bridged on the pack onto a tip/ringpair for each subscriber line. Its combined POTS and ADSL capability eliminates theneed to route the tip/ring pair from a separate POTS AP into an ADSL AP. This APincludes the splitter function for each line. The association of ADSL circuit to POTScircuit is fixed; that is, ADSL circuit 1 is always associated with POTS circuit 1,ADSL circuit 2 is always associated with POTS circuit 2, and so on.
Features and functions
The P32A32 LPA832 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Thirty-two subscriber ports on the faceplate connector, each capable of providingPOTS and ADSL simultaneously, as well as POTS only or ADSL only
• On-board splitter function for each line
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite.
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Interworking with the COMDAC via UART link for inventory and status to createa complete and consistent view of the GSI
• Metallic line test access relays
• POTS services including the following:
– Two-wire loop-start signaling
– V5.x signaling
– Provisionable transmission and signaling (provisionable RxGain/TxGain rangedepends on customer specific termination impedance)
– On-hook transmission
– Support of most CLASS features
– Battery-backed ringing
– PCM encoding A-law/u-law
– Reverse battery metering.
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC-powered rack(J1C283B-1List1) equipped with a PFU500 with P32A32 LPA832 APs replace thePFU500 with a PFU501 and configure dual feeding instead of redundant feeding(that means, remove the jumper on the PFU501).
Important! When two 9.5 A rectifiers are used with a CPS2000 rectifier-ringerplant, then a shelf may not be able to accommodate an LPA832 in every slot. Inthese cases, the remaining slots can be populated with other APs. For example:Assume other equipment (for example, a multiplexer) in the cabinet along with thenarrowband common circuit packs use 315 W.
AFM Maximum number of LPA832 APs
One or two AFMDS3 LPA901 Up to eight LPA832 APs
One or two-AFME3 LPA911 Up to eight LPA832 APs
One or two AFMO LPA920 Up to seven LPA832 APs
One AFME1 LPA941 Up to eight LPA832 APs
Important! If two 11.9 A rectifiers are used with a Yukon 650 power system, thenall AP slots not occupied by AFMs can be populated with LPA832 APs regardlessof whether one or two AFMs are populated and regardless of AFM type. Forcentral office applications the same rules as for Yukon 650 apply.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109296178.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the P32A32 LPA832 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA832
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-3
Faceplate
The following figure shows the P32A32 LPA832 AP faceplate.
CIU
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA832
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPA832
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
BUSY
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA832
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-5
LEDs
LED indicators on the P32A32 LPA832 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
BUSY Lit when a POTS circuit is off-hook or when atest access connection to a customer drop isactive.
Green
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the P32A32 LPA832 AP connector:
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA832
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the P32A32 LPA832 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL32 LPA832 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
The top pair (34 & 68)and bottom pair (1 & 35)are each shorted to alert thecircuit pack that the connectoris attached
3367
Short
68 34
Shot
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Orange binder
Tip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BR/BK
BK/BR
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
ADSL/POTS port 1
ADSL/POTS port 2
ADSL/POTS port 3
ADSL/POTS port 4
ADSL/POTS port 5
ADSL/POTS port 6
ADSL/POTS port 7
ADSL/POTS port 8
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
ADSL/POTS port 9
ADSL/POTS port 10
ADSL/POTS port 11
ADSL/POTS port 12
ADSL/POTS port 13
ADSL/POTS port 14
ADSL/POTS port 15
ADSL/POTS port 16
ADSL/POTS port 17
ADSL/POTS port 18
ADSL/POTS port 19
ADSL/POTS port 20
ADSL/POTS port 21
ADSL/POTS port 22
ADSL/POTS port 23
ADSL/POTS port 24
ADSL/POTS port 25
ADSL/POTS port 26
ADSL/POTS port 27
ADSL/POTS port 28
ADSL/POTS port 29
ADSL/POTS port 30
ADSL/POTS port 31
ADSL/POTS port 32
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA832
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-7
Application pack (P32A32) LPA833...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The P32A32 LPA833 AP provides subscriber interfaces for POTS and ADSL serviceson theAnyMedia® Access System.
The P32A32 LPA833 AP combines POTS and ADSL functions on all 32 pairs. BothPOTS and ADSL signals are bridged on the pack onto a tip/ring pair for eachsubscriber line. Its combined POTS and ADSL capability eliminates the need to routethe tip/ring pair from a separate POTS AP into an ADSL AP. This AP includes thesplitter function for each line. The association of ADSL circuit to POTS circuit isfixed; that is, ADSL circuit 1 is always associated with POTS circuit 1, ADSL circuit 2is always associated with POTS circuit 2, and so on.
Features and functions
The P32A32 LPA833 AP provides the following features and functions:
• Thirty-two subscriber ports on the faceplate connector, each capable of providingPOTS and ADSL simultaneously, as well as POTS only or ADSL only
• Supports ADSL standards ADSL (ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A), ADSL (ANSI T1.413),ADSL2 (ITU G.992.3 Annex A/M), READSL2 (ITU G.992.3 Annex L), andADSL2+ (ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A/M)
• Supports dual ended line tests (DELT)
• On-board splitter function for each line
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• DMT-based RADSL transceivers for each subscriber port
• Rate-adaptive full-rate ADSL
• ATM backplane bus interface
• ATM encapsulated messaging to AFM and customer-premises equipment modems
• Interworking with the COMDAC via UART link for inventory and status to createa complete and consistent view of the GSI
• Metallic line test access relays
• POTS services including the following:
– Two-wire loop-start signaling
– V5.x signaling
– Provisionable transmission and signaling
– On-hook transmission
– Support of most CLASS features
– Battery-backed ringing
– PCM encoding A-law/u-law
– Reverse battery metering.
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Important! If you are upgrading an already existing DC-powered rack(J1C283B-1List1) equipped with a PFU500 with P32A32 LPA833 APs replace thePFU500 with a PFU501 and configure dual feeding instead of redundant feeding(that means, remove the jumper on the PFU501).
Important! When two 9.5 A rectifiers are used with a CPS2000 rectifier-ringerplant, then a shelf may not be able to accommodate an LPA833 in every slot. Inthese cases, the remaining slots can be populated with other APs. For example:Assume other equipment (for example, a multiplexer) in the cabinet along with thenarrowband common circuit packs use 315 W.
AFM Maximum number of LPA833 APs
One or two AFMDS3 LPA901 Up to eight LPA833 APs
One or two AFME3 LPA911 Up to eight LPA833 APs
One or two AFMO LPA920 Up to seven LPA833 APs
One AFME1 LPA941 Up to eight LPA833 APs
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109531475.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the P32A32 LPA833 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA833
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-9
Faceplate
The following figure shows the P32A32 LPA833 AP faceplate.
Backplane Side
LPA833
Faceplate Side
Fuse Module
Analog LineInterface
andSignalingFunctions
Splitters
32ADSL and POTSSubscriber Lines
POTSTest Access
RelayNetwork
CIU
COMDACs(Optional duplex mode)
ADSL
ATM
Bac
kpla
ne B
us
DataControl
ADSLTransceivers
ATMFramer
ATM Mux/Demux
TelephonyControl
AFM
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA833
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LPA833
n:mLucent
FAULT
Con
nect
orR
TH
4455
AA
B
BUSY
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA833
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
8-11
LEDs
LED indicators on the P32A32 LPA833 AP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
BUSY Lit when a POTS circuit is off-hook or when atest access connection to a customer drop isactive.
Green
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the AP connector on the LPA833 is the same as used for theLPA832. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pin assignment” (p. 8-7).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the P32A32 LPA833 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
ADSL32 LPA833 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for narrowband and ATM xDSL services Application pack (P32A32) LPA833
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9 9Application packs for IP-basedservices
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the application packs for IP-based services which are used inthe AnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600 9-2
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600 9-7
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602 9-12
Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633 9-18
VSIM application pack LPV417 9-23
ESIM application pack LPE408 9-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-1
IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPI600 is plugged in the application pack slots of anAnyMedia® Access Systemacting as a host terminal and enables the connected remote terminals to offer VoIPservices. It can be inserted inAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelves (operating in standalonemode) or inAnyMedia® LAG Shelves (operating in IPFM controlled mode or instandalone mode).
Features and functions
The ICAP LPI600
• supports 8 E1 links toAnyMedia® Access Systems acting as remote terminals
• encodes the TDM voice data in IP packets
• transmits the data towards the network in Fast Ethernet frames
• supports channel-associated or common-channel signaling on the E1 side
• supports SIP and H.248 VoIP call setup on the network side
• provides 1:1 pack protection
• supports two Fast Ethernet uplink ports on the faceplate which may also be usedfor remote management (applicable in standalone mode only)
• supports two Fast Ethernet uplink ports on the backplane compatible with IPFMhigh speed links (applicable in IPFM controlled mode only)
• supports local and remote software download capability for software upgrades
• supports configuration backup and database restoration
• supports external RS232 interface for local console OAM&P port
• provides inventory and status to the COMDAC (if equipped) to create a completeand consistent view on the GSI.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109563809.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the ICAP LPI600 functional block diagram.
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the ICAP LPI600 faceplate.
Application packs for IP-based services IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-3
LPI600S1:1
F/A CR MJ/MN
Lucent
CLFFENE
CO
NS
OL
EF
E2
FE
1
B DS1/E1
M DS1/E1
Application packs for IP-based services IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the ICAP LPI600 faceplate:
LED Function Color
STATUS F/A Fail/active
Lit red when a fault is detected onthe ICAP, lit green when the ICAP isactive.
Red/Green
CR Critical
Lit red when a critical fault isdetected on the ICAP.
Red
MJ/MN Major/minor
Lit red when a major fault is detectedon the ICAP, lit yellow when a minorfault is detected on the ICAP.
Red/Yellow
NE Near end
Indicates an alarm or abnormalcondition exists at the shelf or at theassociated cabinet equipment (nearend).
Yellow
FE Far end
Indicates an alarm condition existsremote from the shelf (far end).
Yellow
CLF Carrier Line Failure
Lit when a fault or facility alarmoccurs on the in-service received E1line
Flashes when an AIS alarm occurs onthe E1 line.
Yellow
FE1 Uplink Active Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when 10/100Base-Tx link isestablished.
Green
FE2 Uplink Active Blinks during transmit and receiveactivity on the port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when 10/100Base-Tx link isestablished.
Green
Application packs for IP-based services IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-5
Connectors on the ICAP LPI600 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 Local console OAM&Pport to be used with acustom adapter cable withUSB-style connector (see“Ordering Guide”363-211-144)
FE1 RJ-45
10/100Base-Tx
Fast Ethernet 1 uplink port
FE2 RJ-45
10/100Base-Tx
Fast Ethernet 2 uplink port
B DS1/E1 36-pin AMP champ ribbonstyle
Buddy E1/DS1 interface
M DS1/E1 36-pin AMP champ ribbonstyle
Main E1/DS1 interface
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the ICAP LPI600 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPI600 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for IP-based services IP COMDAC application pack (ICAP) LPI600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ600 supports voice via V5 interface and VoIP services. On subscriber sidePOTS telephones are required. The IP voice and signaling packets are transferredtowards the IP network via two 100Base-Tx uplinks going to either IPFM. For V5voice, the LPZ600 can interwork with the LAG COMDACs COM503 and COM520.
Voice via the V5 interface is currently not supported by the software for the LPZ600.
Features and functions
The VoIP LPZ600 application pack supports:
• Downloadable software
• 32 subscriber lines for TDM-based POTS and/or VoIP services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• A-law and u-law PCM encoding
• Normal and reverse battery feeding and loop supervision
• Programmable termination impedance and balance networks
• Programmable receive gain and transmit gain value
• Constant current feeding type, 29 mA out of -48 V
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• 10 and 20 PPS dial pulsing
• DTMF dialing
• H.248 and SIP support
• Call progress tone generation
• Modem and fax tone detection
• DTMF and modem PBX Dial in
• Inward testing and outward testing
• Faceplate serial interface for management
• One 10/100Base-Tx port (RJ-45 socket at the faceplate) for standalone uplink (notyet supported by the software)
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109504381.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the VoIP LPZ600 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-7
Faceplate
The following figure shows the VoIP LPZ600 AP faceplate.
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Red fault LED
POTS connector
Yellow active LED
Green link up LED
Serial port connector
10/100Base-TxEthernet connector
FAULT
LPZ600
LAN
CONSOLE
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-9
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the VoIP LPZ600 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on theapplication pack.
Red
LAN Active Indicates transmit and receive activityon the port.
Yellow
Link up Lit when an Ethernet link isestablished.
Green
Connectors on the VoIP LPZ600 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
POTS connector 64-pin AMP-LOC Connector for TDM-basedPOTS and/or VoIP services
LAN RJ-45 Uplink port in standaloneconfiguration, not used incontrolled mode.
CONSOLE RJ-45 Serial port, only used instandalone mode for initialsystem turn-up.
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the VoIP LPZ600 POTS connector:
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the VoIP LPZ600 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ600 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Ring11
32
2
31BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
BL/W
BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
BL/W
Ring2
Ring3
Ring4
Ring5
Ring6
Ring7
Ring8
Ring9
Ring10
Ring11
Ring12
Ring13
Ring14
Ring15
Ring16
Ring17
Ring18
Ring19
Ring20
Ring22
Ring23
Ring24
Ring25
Ring26
Ring27
Ring28
Ring29
Ring30
Ring21
Ring31
Ring32
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
Tip1
Tip2
Tip3
Tip4
Tip5
Tip6
Tip7
Tip8
Tip9
Tip10
Tip11
Tip12
Tip13
Tip14
Tip15
Tip16
Tip17
Tip18
Tip19
Tip20
Tip22
Tip23
Tip24
Tip25
Tip26
Tip27
Tip28
Tip29
Tip30
Tip21
Tip31
Tip32
33
34
63
64
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ600
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-11
POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ602 supports VoIP services for 64 POTS subscribers. The IP voice andsignaling packets are transferred towards the IP network via two 100Base-Tx uplinksgoing to either IPFM.
Features and functions
The VoIP LPZ602 application pack supports:
• Downloadable software
• 64 subscriber lines for TDM-based POTS and/or VoIP services
• 2-wire loop start signaling
• A-law and u-law PCM encoding
• Normal and reverse battery feeding and loop supervision
• Programmable termination impedance and balance networks
• Programmable receive gain and transmit gain value
• Constant current feed: 28 mA and 43 mA
• Earth-backed and battery-backed ringing
• Up to 25 PPS dial pulsing
• DTMF dialing
• H.248, SIP and MGCP support
• Call progress tone generation
• Modem and fax tone detection
• DTMF and modem PBX Dial in
• Inward test and outward test access.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109570739.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the VoIP LPZ602 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the VoIP LPZ602 AP faceplate.
Backplane Side
LPZ602
L2 Switch/Ethernet Interface
Faceplate Side
IP SpokeIPFMs(Optional duplex mode)
CIU- Test Access
-48V
32 a/bPairsfor VoIPPOTS
32 a/bPairsfor VoIPPOTS
COMDACs(Optional duplex mode)- Transmission Bandwidth- Communications and Control- System Timing Host, Packet
and Voice Processing
FPGA
Cod
ec, S
LIC
Power Modules
+1.8V+1.2V +3.3V
+5.0V
TDM Spoke
- Test IN- Test OUT
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-13
Red Fault LED
POTS Connector P2Lines 33-64
FAULT
LPZ602
POTS Connector P1Lines 1-32
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the VoIP LPZ602 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT On pack insertion or reset the LED is on for5 seconds, then blinks at a rate of 2 Hz whilethe pack is booting, and then goes off. If anerror condition exists the LED will remain on.During on demand diagnostics the LED blinksat a rate of 1 Hz.
Red
Connectors on the VoIP LPZ602 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
POTS P1 64-pin AMP-LOC POTS connector, lines 1 to32
POTS P2 64-pin AMP-LOC POTS connector, lines 33to 64
Pin assignment connector P1
Pin assignment of the VoIP LPZ602 POTS connector P1:
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-15
Pin assignment connector P2
Pin assignment of the VoIP LPZ602 POTS connector P2:
Wiring side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Ring11
32
2
31BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
BL/W
BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
BL/W
Ring2
Ring3
Ring4
Ring5
Ring6
Ring7
Ring8
Ring9
Ring10
Ring11
Ring12
Ring13
Ring14
Ring15
Ring16
Ring17
Ring18
Ring19
Ring20
Ring22
Ring23
Ring24
Ring25
Ring26
Ring27
Ring28
Ring29
Ring30
Ring21
Ring31
Ring32
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
Tip1
Tip2
Tip3
Tip4
Tip5
Tip6
Tip7
Tip8
Tip9
Tip10
Tip11
Tip12
Tip13
Tip14
Tip15
Tip16
Tip17
Tip18
Tip19
Tip20
Tip22
Tip23
Tip24
Tip25
Tip26
Tip27
Tip28
Tip29
Tip30
Tip21
Tip31
Tip32
33
34
63
64
Bluebinder
Orangebinder
Orangebinder
Bluebinder
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the VoIP LPZ602 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPZ602 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Wiring side
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Ring331
32
2
31BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
BL/W
BR/BK
BL/Y
BL/BK
BL/R
S/W
BR/W
G/W
O/W
S/R
BR/R
G/R
O/R
S/BK
G/BK
O/BK
BL/W
Ring34
Ring35
Ring36
Ring37
Ring38
Ring39
Ring40
Ring41
Ring42
Ring43
Ring44
Ring45
Ring46
Ring47
Ring48
Ring49
Ring50
Ring51
Ring52
Ring54
Ring55
Ring56
Ring57
Ring58
Ring59
Ring60
Ring61
Ring62
Ring53
Ring63
Ring64
Y/BL
BK/BL
R/BL
W/BL
W/S
W/BR
W/G
W/O
R/S
R/BR
R/G
R/O
BK/S
BK/BR
BK/G
BK/O
Tip33
Tip34
Tip35
Tip36
Tip37
Tip38
Tip39
Tip40
Tip41
Tip42
Tip43
Tip44
Tip45
Tip46
Tip47
Tip48
Tip49
Tip50
Tip51
Tip52
Tip54
Tip55
Tip56
Tip57
Tip58
Tip59
Tip60
Tip61
Tip62
Tip53
Tip63
Tip64
33
34
63
64
Greenbinder
Brownbinder
Brownbinder
Greenbinder
Application packs for IP-based services POTS application pack (VoIP AP) LPZ602
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-17
Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 supports 32 ports of packetized ADSL2/2+ services.The ADSL packets are transferred towards the IP network via two 100Base-Tx uplinksgoing to either IPFM. The LPA633 AP contains Ethernet interfaces for both thebackplane and the standalone RJ-45s interfaces on the mezzanine boards. The LPA633interworks with the COMDAC and IPFM.
Features and functions
The IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 provides the following features and functions:
• Thirty two subscriber lines for ADSL, ADSL2, and ADSL2+ services
• POTS ports and ADSL subscriber ports on faceplate connector
• Supports ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ Annex A/M standards
• On board splitter function for each line
• On board high pass filter
• Metallic line test access relay
• Faceplate serial interface for management
• Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T (RJ-45 sockets at the faceplate) for standalone uplink
• Interworking with COMDAC (if equipped) via UART link for inventory and statusto create a complete and consistent view on the GSI
• Network timing reference (NTR) to ATU-R according to ANSI T1.413, ITU-TG.992.1 (G.dmt), ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite), G992.3 (ADSL2), and G992.5 (ADSL2+)
• Support for four ATM service classes: UBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and CBR
• ADSL rate-adaptive/rate-provisionable:
– Full-rate ADSL
– ADSL-lite.
– ADSL2
– ADSL2+.
• TCPIP control message to the IPFM
• IP backplane interface over 100Base-Tx interfaces.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109563817.
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 faceplate.
Backplane Side
LPA633
942A
L2 Switch/Ethernet Interface
Faceplate Side
COMDACs(Optional duplex mode)- Communications and Control- System Timing
IP SpokeIPFMs(Optional duplex mode)
CIU- Test Access
NPU
3 x 12 ADSLDSPs
3 AFEs
Test AccessRelays
High PassFilter
POTSSplitters
-48V
ConsoleandRJ45s
32 a/bPairsforPOTS
32 a/bPairsforADSLPOTS
Application packs for IP-based services Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-19
Red Fault LED
POTS splitter connector
Yellow active LEDsGreen Link up LEDs
10/100Base-TManagement Port
FAULT
LPA633
Lucent
Sn:m
100/1000Base-TStandalone Uplinks
CO
NS
OLE
LAN
3LA
N2
LAN
1P
OT
S
PO
TS
- A
DS
L
ADSL + POTS a/b connector
Application packs for IP-based services Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Lit when a fault is detected on the applicationpack.
Flashes during software download and duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Active Indicates transmit and receive activity on theport.
Yellow
Link up Lit when an Ethernet link is established. Green
Connectors on the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
POTS 72-pin Metral POTS connector
POTS-ADSL 72-pin Metral POTS-ADSL connector tosubscriber
CONSOLE RS-232 Local console OAM&Pport to be used with acustom adapter cable withUSB-style connector(DB9-to-USB RS232, see“Ordering Guide”363-211-144)
LAN1 RJ-45 10/100Base-Txmanagement port
LAN2 RJ-45 100/1000Base-T uplink
LAN3 RJ-45 100/1000Base-T uplink
Important! Although the CONSOLE connector below the FAULT LED looks likea USB connector, it is not a USB connector. It will not work if a laptop isconnected, but attaching a true USB host or peripheral to this port may damage theUSB drivers of this device or the LPA633. Always use an adapter cable toCONSOLE port with USB-A connector (DB9-to-USB RS232).
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 connectors POTS and POTS-ADSL.Shown is a schematic of the front view of the connectors on the faceplate.
Application packs for IP-based services Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-21
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the IPADSL2_32p AP LPA633 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPA633 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Ring31
Ring29
Ring27
Ring25
Ring23
Ring21
Ring19
Ring17
Ring15
Ring13
Ring11
Ring9
Ring7
Ring5
Ring3
Ring1
Tip31
Tip29
Tip27
Tip25
Tip23
Tip21
Tip19
Tip17
Tip15
Tip13
Tip11
Tip9
Tip7
Tip5
Tip3
Tip1
Ring32
GRD
Ring30
Ring28
Ring26
Ring24
Ring22
Ring20
Ring18
Ring16
Ring14
Ring12
Ring10
Ring8
Ring6
Ring4
Ring2
Tip32
GRD
Tip30
Tip28
Tip26
Tip24
Tip22
Tip20
Tip18
Tip16
Tip14
Tip12
Tip10
Tip8
Tip6
Tip4
Tip2
Application packs for IP-based services Application pack (IPADSL2_32p) LPA633
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
VSIM application pack LPV417...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The VDSL subscriber interface module (VSIM) application pack LPV417 is a VDSLapplication pack. It is installed in anAnyMedia® LAG Shelf.
The LPV417 accommodates 16 VDSL line circuits and an Ethernet switch providingconnectivity among the line circuits, two backplane 100Base-Tx ports, and two front100Base-Tx ports. The Ethernet switch supports L2 through L7 packet classification,QoS, traffic conditioning and access control functions.
Features and functions
The VSIM AP LPV417 provides the following features and functions:
• Support of 16 lines
• On-board POTS splitters
• Support of the bandplans 998 and Long Reach VDSL involving US0 (25 -138 kHz) and the bandwidth between 138 kHz and 1100 kHz for downstreamtraffic via programmable filters
• Rate adaptive mode supported at provisionable steps of 3 Mbps
• 50 Mbps in downstream direction and up to 21.7 Mbps in upstream directionsupported for distances of up to 5.2 km allow the transmission of multiple videostreams
• Upstream power back off (UPBO) can be switched on and off via provisioning
• Notch filters can be enabled or disabled
• ADSL band use can be switched on or off via provisioning
• VDSL performance monitoring
• UART interface to COMDAC
• Relays for line testing
• Support of on-demand subscriber line testing
• Self-test and diagnostics for a single circuit on demand when the port is out ofservice
• Self-test and diagnostics upon initialization of the pack
• Two internal 100Base-Tx uplinks on spokes, duplex IPFM ready
• Two 100Base-Tx uplinks on faceplate, hardware-ready for standalone mode
• Serial interface for command line interface (CLI).
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-23
The transmission rate is specified as follows:
• Using bandplan 998, the following rate reach data can be achieved:
– 50/7 Mbps DS/US Bandplan 998 at 300 m
– 45/5 Mbps DS/US Bandplan 998 at 500 m
– 25/3 Mbps DS/US Bandplan 998 at 1 km
• In long reach mode, the following rate reach data can be achieved:
– Asymmetric aggregate bandwidth > 40 Mbps at 300 m
– Asymmetric aggregate bandwidth > 20 Mbps at 1 km
– Asymmetric aggregate bandwidth > 10 Mbps at 2.4 km
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109549725.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPV417 AP functional block diagram.
Application packs for IP-based services VSIM application pack LPV417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPV417 AP faceplate.
10/100 PHY
Ethernet Switch
VDSLmodem22827
Hybrid
Splitter
Surge&Fuse
Surge&Fuse
SMII
X 16
GPSI
CPU Bus
SDRAM
CPUPCI BusController
SDRAM
PCI
COMDAC
SMC
- 48V to12V
2.5V 1.8V 1.2V3.3V
MUX
Flash
SMC
Console
Development
Clock Gen.
I2C
-Backplane
DC -48V
Front Panel68 Pin DIN Connector(LINE x16 Port+ MDF x16 port ) Power Supply
14V
10/100 PHY
SMII&
MDIO
SMII&
MDIO
Front PanelRJ45x2
Relay
MDIO
Relay
Line
Application packs for IP-based services VSIM application pack LPV417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-25
Lucent
FAULT
LPV417
UP2
UP1
LIFT
TO
INSERT
CONNECTOR
EJECT
B34
A1
Link/Act.
Link/Act.
100Base/Tx mode
100Base/Tx mode
CONSOLE
Application packs for IP-based services VSIM application pack LPV417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the LPV417 faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when the pack power fails
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Link/ACT Lit when an Ethernet link is established
Flashes during Tx/Rx data transmitting
Yellow
Speed 100Base-Tx mode Green
Connectors on the LPV417 faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 Not to be used by thecustomer
UP2 RJ-45 For future use
UP1 RJ-45 For future use
Important! Although the CONSOLE connector above the FAULT LED looks likea USB connector, it is not a USB connector. It will not work if a laptop isconnected, but attaching a true USB host or peripheral to this port may damage theUSB drivers of this device or the LPV417.
Pin assignment
The pin assignment of the 32 ports a/b connector on the LPV417 is the same as usedfor most POTS APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in“Pinassignment” (p. 6-21).
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPV417 AP in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPV417 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for IP-based services VSIM application pack LPV417
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-27
ESIM application pack LPE408...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ethernet subscriber interface module (ESIM) LPE408 is an Ethernet circuit packinstalled in anAnyMedia® LAG Shelf. In LAG200 applications the LPE408 can workas a controller pack for two IP APs.
The LPE408 accommodates 8 Fast Ethernet (100Base-FX, 100Base-Tx, 100Base-BX)subscriber lines and 1 Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-SX/1000Base-LX/1000Base-T)uplink on the faceplate. It also supports internal Ethernet interfaces such as twobackplane 100Base-Tx ports for active/standby IPFM. In LAG200 applications, theLPE408 has two 100Base-Tx spokes to slots 2-3, and one 100Base-Tx spoke for ATP.The LPE408 supports L3/L4 packet classification, QoS, congestion management andaccess control functions.
Features and functions
The ESIM LPE408 provides the following features and functions:
• Support of 8 Fast Ethernet (SFP, Small Form-factor Pluggable Module) downlinks
• Support of 1 Gigabit Ethernet (SFP) uplink
• Two 100Base-Tx uplinks on the backplane to active/standby IPFM
• Two 100Base-Tx spokes to slots 2-3 for controller mode in LAG200 applications
• One 100Base-Tx spoke to ATP slot in LAG200 applications
• Can work as a controller pack for two IP APs in LAG200 applications
• UART interface to COMDAC/ATP
• Three alarm inputs
• Self-test and diagnostics upon initialization of the pack
• Serial interface for command line interface (CLI).
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109581215.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the LPE408 circuit pack functional block diagram.
Application packs for IP-based services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the LPE408 circuit pack faceplate.
BA
CK
PLA
NE
Processor &
Control Block
Local
Memory Block
Switching Engine Block
Physical Layer &
Interface Block
Power Block
2 FE for IPFMs
2 FE spokes to slots 2-3 of LAG2001 FE for ATP
2 GE for GE-IPFM (for future use)1 GE for CCL with adjacent LPE408
GbE
UART to COMDAC/ATP
-48VDC
100Base-T
Address
Memory Block
Packet
Buffer Block
LEDs
ALARM/SHID/SLOTIDRS232 for CONSOLE
FA
CE
PLA
TE
8 Ports (SFP)100Base-FX/T/BX10
1 Port(SFP)1000Base-SX/LX/T
10/100Base-Tx for MGMT10/100Base-Tx for GSI/EMS
1 Port (SFP)
100Base-Tx
Application packs for IP-based services ESIM application pack LPE408
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-29
FAULT
LPE408
Lucent
CO
NS
OL
EM
GM
TLN
KT
RF
12
34
56
78
9(G
E)
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
TX
RX
TX
RX
Application packs for IP-based services ESIM application pack LPE408
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connectors
LED indicators on the LPE408 circuit pack faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the AP
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hzduring pack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
MGMT LNK Lit when an Ethernet link is established Green
TRF Flashes during Tx/Rx data transmitting Green
1 to 9
(9 is the Gigabit Ethernetuplink)
Lit when an Ethernet link is established on theappropriate SFP module
Flashes during Tx/Rx data transmitting on theappropriate SFP module
Green
Connectors on the LPE408 circuit pack faceplate:
Connector Type Function
CONSOLE RS-232 Local console OAM&Pport to be used with acustom adapter cable withUSB-style connector(DB9-to-USB RS232, see“Ordering Guide”363-211-144)
MGMT RJ-45 Local MGMT
1 to 8 SFP Fast Ethernet downlinkports
100Base-FX/100Base-TX/100Base-BX
9(GE) SFP Gigabit Ethernet uplinkport
1000Base-SX/1000Base-LX/1000Base-T
Important! Although the CONSOLE connector below the FAULT LED looks likea USB connector, it is not a USB connector. It will not work if a laptop isconnected, but attaching a true USB host or peripheral to this port may damage theUSB drivers of this device or the LPE408. Always use an adapter cable toCONSOLE port with USB-A connector (DB9-to-USB RS232).
Application packs for IP-based services ESIM application pack LPE408
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
9-31
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the LPE408 circuit pack in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
LPE408 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Application packs for IP-based services ESIM application pack LPE408
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-32 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10 10Service independent commonpacks
Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter describes the service independent common packs which are used in theAnyMedia® Access System.
Contents
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100 10-2
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU500 10-7
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU510 10-10
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550 10-13
Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) RGP100 10-17
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU501 10-20
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU502 10-23
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU503 10-26
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU520 10-29
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU503 10-31
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU520 10-33
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU523 10-35
Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101) 10-37
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-1
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) provides the ringing voltage for theAnyMedia®
LAG 4300 Shelf and for theAnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf. It is a one slot pack, whichmay be plugged in any application pack slot of the shelf.
Features and functions
The main features and functions of the RGU are:
• Ringing power 100 VA
• Ringing output voltage selectable (70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 Vrms) via jumpersettings or via provisioning
• Five ringing frequencies selectable (16/20/25/30/50 Hz) via jumper settings or viaprovisioning
• Provides battery-backed or earth-backed ringing
• Protection circuits against reverse polarity at the DC input, for output overvoltageprotection, overcurrent protection, overtemperature protection, and surge protection
• Automatic output power control
• Use of two RGU100 provides ringer pack protection in an active/stand-by mode
• Can be configured via a jumper to work in the so-called “uncontrolled” mode.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109587055.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RGU functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-2 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RGU faceplate.
Ringing output
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-3
RGU100S1:1
FAULT
Lucent
ACTIVE
RGU ALARM
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-4 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs, connector
LED indicators on the RGU faceplate:
LED (1) Function Color
FAULT (2) Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the ringinggenerator unit.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringbuilt-in self-test.
Red
ACTIVE Lit when the pack is the active RGU,responsible for providing the ringing voltage.On the standby RGU the LED does not light.
Green
Notes:
1. During a restart of the pack both LEDs light for approximately 5 s.
2. The FAULT LED does not flash during the built-in self test because all tests arecompleted within a very short time.
Connector on the RGU faceplate:
Connector Type Function
RGU ALARM DB-9
9-pin D-sub
Local connector foralarming purposes, can beused in “uncontrolled”mode to allow alarming viathe alarm connection panel
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RGU in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RGU 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
DIP switch settings
There are eight DIP switches on the RGU100 for selecting the ringing frequency, theringing output voltage, the ringing mode, and the master mode. The default deliverysetting for the master mode is “controlled” mode. In the “uncontrolled” mode, theringing frequency, the ringing output voltage, and the ringing mode are configured bythe DIP switch settings. In the “controlled” mode, these parameters are defined via theCOMDAC and the DIP switch settings are not valid.
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-5
The following figure shows the RGU100 DIP switches with the default deliverysetting.
K2-1
16 H z
-
-
On
- -
-
FrequencyK2-3K2-2
On
-
-
-
On
-
On
On
-
20 H z
25 H z
30 H z
50 H z
K2-4
70 VAC
-
-
On
-
-
VoltageK2-6K2-5
On
-
-
-
On
-
On
On
-
75 VAC
80 VAC
85VAC
90 VAC
95 VAC
100 VAC
On
-
-
On
-
On
On
K1-1
Earth-backed (EB)
On
-
Ringing mode
Battery-backed (BB)
K1-2
Controlled mode
On
-
Master mode
Uncontrolled mode
On position
Off position (-)
K2
DIP
1 2 3 4 5 6
K1
ON
1 2
ON
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-6 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU500...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) provides the ringing voltage for theAnyMedia®
LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The main features and functions of the RGU are:
• Converts the DC input voltage to an AC ringing voltage for POTS APs
• Four ringing frequencies selectable (17/20/25/50 Hz) via jumper settings (defaultfrequency is 25 Hz)
• Provides battery-backed ringing
• Protection circuits against reverse polarity at the input, for output overvoltageprotection, overcurrent protection, overtemperature protection, and surge protection
• Can continuously provide 30 VA
• Automatic output power control.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109589473.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RGU500 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-7
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RGU500 faceplate.
SurgeProtection
ProtectionCircuit
CouplingNetwork
=
DC/AC Module
≈ Ring
Tip
-48A External
-48RTN
FRMGND
-48B External-48
Y-Capacitor
AdjustmentRinging Frequency
InputFilter
RGU500
n:m
Lucent
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU500
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-8 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RGU500 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RGU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU500
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-9
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU510...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) provides the ringing voltage for theAnyMedia®
LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The main features and functions of the RGU are:
• Converts the DC input voltage to an AC ringing voltage for POTS APs
• Four ringing frequencies selectable (17/20/25/50 Hz) via jumper settings (defaultfrequency is 17 Hz)
• Two ringing output voltages selectable (75/86 Vrms) via jumper settings (defaultoutput voltage is 75 Vrms)
• Provides earth-backed ringing
• Protection circuits against reverse polarity at the input, for output overvoltageprotection, overcurrent protection, overtemperature protection, and surge protection
• Can continuously provide 30 VA
• Automatic output power control.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109534669.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RGU510 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-10 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RGU510 faceplate.
SurgeProtection
ProtectionCircuit =
DC/AC Module
≈ Ring
Tip
-48A External
-48RTN
FRMGND
-48B External-48
AdjustmentRinging Frequency
Output voltage
InputFilter
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-11
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RGU510 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RGU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU510
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-12 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) provides the ringing voltage for theAnyMedia®
LAG 1900 Shelf.
Features and functions
The main features and functions of the RGU are:
• Converts the DC input voltage to an AC ringing voltage for POTS APs
• Ringing output voltage selectable (70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 Vrms) via jumpersettings or via provisioning
• Five ringing frequencies selectable (16/20/25/30/50 Hz) via jumper settings or viaprovisioning
• Provides battery-backed or earth-backed ringing
• Supports simplex or duplex operation
• Protection circuits against reverse polarity at the input, for output overvoltageprotection, overcurrent protection, overtemperature protection, and surge protection
• Can continuously provide 50 VA
• Automatic output power control
• Two RGU550 build an independent protection group on its own, that is, notcontrolled by the COMDAC
• Indicates the following alarm conditions via alarm output:
– The ringing output AC voltage drops below 60 Vrms during normal operation,that is, from idling up to rated load (for packs with interchangeability code S1:1only)
– The ringing output AC voltage drops below 50 Vrms in constant power mode(for packs with interchangeability code S1:1 only)
– Over temperature
– Over voltage of the AC component (105 Vrms)
– In duplex operation the configuration of both RGUs does not match, and thestatus of the standby RGU is alarmed, for packs with interchangeability code>S1:1 a detection of any failure on the standby pack, or activation of an alarmif the standby pack is missing
– Hardware diagnostic failure.
Note: The alarming for the RGU550 in standby mode has been implemented for packswith interchangeability code >S1:1. The ringing output behavior is identical for allRGUs independent of interchangeability codes.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-13
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109587063.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RGU550 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RGU550 faceplate.
Alarm
RGU550
S n:m
Lucent
FAULTACTIVE LED
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-14 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicators on the RGU faceplate:
LED (1) Function Color
FAULT (2) Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the ringinggenerator unit.
If two RGU550 are in duplex operation andthe settings of the DIP switches on bothRGU550 are not identical, the FAULT LEDblinks on both packs. None of them becomesactive.
Red
ACTIVE Lit when the pack is the active RGU,responsible for providing the ringing voltage.On the standby RGU the LED does not light.
Green
Notes:
1. During a restart of the pack both LEDs light for approximately 5 s.
2. The FAULT LED does not flash during the built-in self test because all tests arecompleted within a very short time.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RGU550 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RGU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
DIP switch settings
There are eight DIP switches on the RGU550 for selecting the ringing frequency, theringing output voltage, the ringing mode, and the master mode.
The default delivery setting is 25 Hz, 80 Vrms, battery-backed ringing, and the mastermode on “duplex” for packs with interchangeability code >S1:1. For packs withinterchangeability code S1:1 is the DIP switch in position “Uncontrolled mode” perdefault.
The following figure shows the RGU550 DIP switches with the default deliverysetting.
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-15
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Unit (RGU) RGU550
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-16 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) RGP100...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) provides the ringing voltage for theAnyMedia®
LAG 4300 Shelf. It is a dual slot pack, which may be plugged in slot 40/41 and slot42/43 of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf.
Features and functions
The main features and functions of the RGP are:
• Ringing power 100 VA
• Programmable ringing voltage 75, 80, 85, or 90 Vrms
• Three programmable ringing frequencies (20/25/30 Hz)
• Bias: battery-backed or earth-backed ringing
• Programmable overload threshold.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108405416 (RGP100B).
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RGP functional block diagram.
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)Communications andControl
RGP100
-48V External
-48RTN
DC/AC Module
AdjustmentRinging Frequency/
Voltage Level
Ring
Tip
FullBridge
Converter
OutputControl
OverloadControl
InputFilter
=
≈
Microprocessor Complex
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-17
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RGP faceplate.
LED
RGP100n:m
Lucent
FAULT
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) RGP100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-18 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
LEDs
LED indicator on the RGP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the ringinggenerator pack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Yellow
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RGP in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RGP 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
Service independent common packs Ringing Generator Pack (RGP) RGP100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-19
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU501...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The power filter unit (PFU) accommodates two internal filters for dual powerdistribution. The PFU is located within the mainshelf and is part of it in order to fulfillEMC requirements. In cases where no PFU is needed, the PFU must be bypassed overpower lugs on the backplane (see the functional block diagram of the PFU). Gradualcharging of the capacitors is provided and also the inrush current surge is limited.
Features and functions
The main functions of the PFU are:
• Noise filtering of both DC power inputs in both directions
• Protection of theAnyMedia® Access System against transient overvoltages
• Supply of redundant powering
• Voltage gap buffering up to 5 ms at nominal voltage
• Surge protection.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108791294.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the PFU501 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-20 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the PFU501 faceplate.
PFU
Filter Unitand Overvoltage
ProtectionSurge Protectionand
RedundantOperation
-48A External
Y-Capacitor
-48B ExternalFilter Unit
and OvervoltageProtection
-48A
-48B
-48RTN
FRMGND
Power lugs on the backplane
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-21
DANGER
Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or thePower Filter Unit (PFU).
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Ensure that the power is OFF before removing or inserting the Power Filter Unit.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the PFU501 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
PFU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 70 mm
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU501
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-22 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU502...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The power filter unit (PFU) is build up as an insertion circuit pack for one outputpower feeder -48V and connects theAnyMedia® LAG 200 Shelf with the DC powersupply by one power input feeder (-48A or -48B) or by two power input feeders (-48Aand -48B). In cases where no PFU is needed, the PFU must be bypassed over powerlug on the backplane (see the functional block diagram of the PFU). Gradual chargingof the capacitors is provided and also the inrush current surge is limited.
Features and functions
The main functions of the PFU are:
• Noise filtering of both DC power inputs in both directions
• Protection of theAnyMedia® Access System against transient overvoltages
• Supply of redundant powering
• Voltage gap buffering
• Surge protection.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109205716.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the PFU502 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-23
Faceplate
The following figure shows the PFU502 faceplate.
DANGER
Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or thePower Filter Unit (PFU).
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Ensure that the power is OFF before removing or inserting the Power Filter Unit.
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU502
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-24 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the PFU502 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
PFU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU502
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-25
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU503...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The power filter unit (PFU) is build up as an insertion circuit pack for one outputpower feeder -48V and connects theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf with the DC powersupply by two power input feeders -48A and -48B. In cases where no PFU is needed,the PFU must be bypassed over power lug on the backplane (see the functional blockdiagram of the PFU). Gradual charging of the capacitors is provided and also theinrush current surge is limited.
Features and functions
The main functions of the PFU are:
• Noise filtering of both DC power inputs in both directions
• Protection of theAnyMedia® Access System against transient overvoltages
• Supply of redundant powering
• Voltage gap buffering
• Surge protection.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109539288.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the PFU503 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-26 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Faceplate
The following figure shows the PFU503 faceplate.
DANGER
Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or thePower Filter Unit (PFU).
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Ensure that the power is OFF before removing or inserting the Power Filter Unit.
Note : The PFU503 is two slots wide
SWITCH CB -48VOFF BEFOREREMOVING THIS UNIT
WARNING: HOT SURFACE BEHIND FACEPLATE
PFU503
S n:m
Lucent
OO
-48V
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU503
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-27
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the PFU503 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
PFU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 50 mm
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU503
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-28 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU520...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The power filter unit (PFU) accommodates two internal filters for two power supplyfeeders. The PFU is located within the power distribution frame of the cabinet and ispart of it in order to fulfill EMC requirements. Gradual charging of the capacitors isprovided and also the inrush current surge is limited.
Features and functions
The main functions of the PFU are:
• Noise filtering of both DC power input feeders in both directions
• Protection of theAnyMedia® Access System against transient overvoltages
• Providing of OR-ing diode or single feed functionality
• Voltage gap buffering
• Surge protection.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109320051.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the PFU520 functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the PFU520 faceplate.
PFU
Filter Unitand Overvoltage
Protection
Surge Protectionand
OR-ing diodefunctionality/single feed
-48A External
-48B ExternalFilter Unit
and OvervoltageProtection
-48F0
-48F1
-48RTNB
ProtectionDevice
ProtectionDevice
-48RTNA
FRMGND
-48RTNA
-48RTNB
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-29
DANGER
Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or thePower Filter Unit (PFU).
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Ensure that the power is OFF before removing or inserting the Power Filter Unit.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the PFU520 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
PFU 103.9 mm 387.1 mm 48.1 mm
A
W ARNINGHO T SURFACE
BEHIND FACEPLATE
Lucent PFU520
FE
ED
0
FE
ED
1OO OO
Service independent common packs Power Filter Unit (PFU) PFU520
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-30 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU503...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For centralized ringing supply in central office applications, the ringing filter unit(RFU) is needed in order to provide protection against transients for the internalringing bus. The RFU is build up as an insertion circuit pack which has to be installedin the RGU slot 0 of theAnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf. It connects theAnyMedia®
LAG 1900 Shelf with the external ringing source and is used to avoid damages of theringing input on the application packs. The protection is necessary if the length of theexternal ringing cable is longer than 3 m (unshielded) or longer than 10 m (shielded).
Features and functions
The main functions of the RFU503 are:
• Works in mesh-BN or mesh-IBN installations which conform with EN 300 253
• Filter module for slew rate limitation to values below 200V/µs and voltagelimitation to values below 320Vp-p
• Fuse protection via two 5 x 20 mm “Time Lag Fuses” of 2A
• Supports earth-backed ringing.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109552414.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RFU503 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-31
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RFU503 faceplate.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RFU503 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RFU 1N (96 mm) 200 mm 100 mm
Service independent common packs Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU503
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-32 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU520...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For centralized ringing supply in central office applications, the ringing filter unit(RFU) is needed in order to provide protection against transients for the internalringing busses. The RFU is mounted in the cabinet distribution frame of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf. It connects theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf with theexternal ringing source and is used to avoid damages of the ringing input on theapplication packs. The protection is necessary if the length of the external ringing cableis longer than 3 m (unshielded) or longer than 10 m (shielded).
Features and functions
The main functions of the RFU520 are:
• Works in mesh-BN installations which conform with EN 300 253
• Slew rate limitation to values below 200V/µs
• Limitation of transients of the applied input voltage to values below 320Vp-p
• Fuse protection via two 5 x 20 mm “Time Lag Fuses” of 2A
• Supports battery-backed ringing.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109320077.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RFU520 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-33
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RFU520 faceplate.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RFU520 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RFU 53 mm 83 mm 94 mm
OO
Lucent
RFU520
2 AMP
F2
OO
2 AMP
F1
Service independent common packs Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU520
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-34 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU523...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For centralized ringing supply in central office applications, the ringing filter unit(RFU) is needed in order to provide protection against transients for the internalringing busses. The RFU is mounted in the cabinet distribution frame of theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf. It connects theAnyMedia® LAG 4300 Shelf with theexternal ringing source and is used to avoid damages of the ringing input on theapplication packs. The protection is necessary if the length of the external ringing cableis longer than 3 m (unshielded) or longer than 10 m (shielded).
Features and functions
The main functions of the RFU523 are:
• Works in mesh-BN or mesh-IBN installations which conform with EN 300 253
• Slew rate limitation to values below 200V/µs
• Limitation of transients of the applied input voltage to values below 320Vp-p
• Fuse protection via two 5 x 20 mm “Time Lag Fuses” of 2A
• Supports earth-backed ringing.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 109554949.
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the RFU523 functional block diagram.
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-35
Faceplate
The following figure shows the RFU523 faceplate.
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the RFU523 in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
RFU 53 mm 83 mm 94 mm
OO
Lucent
RFU523
2 AMP
F2
OO
2 AMP
F1
Service independent common packs Ringing Filter Unit (RFU) RFU523
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-36 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Three versions of the test application pack (TAP) are used in theAnyMedia® AccessSystem: TAP100, TAP100B, and TAP101. The test application pack is used for droptesting, that is testing of the subscriber line. Channel tests, that is testing of the porthardware in theAnyMedia® Access System, are performed on each application packusing a part of their self-test capability. The TAP is connected via the test access path(TAP-B), the CIU, and the general purpose bus (GPB) to the application pack.Corresponding wiring must have been performed as part of the installation.
Features and functions
The TAP100 supports the measurement of
• All AC and DC foreign voltages of the a-wire and b-wire of a drop
• Feeding voltage measurement (POTS/ISDN APs)
• Insulation and loop resistance of the a/b-wire of a drop
• Capacitance of the a/b-wire of a drop
• Distance to open measurement for a specified drop
• Detection test of the test termination in the master line jack of the subscriber
• Draw and break dial tone test
• DTMF and pulse character test
• Sending a test tone for POTS CPE.
The TAP100B supports in addition
• Noise measurement on a subscriber line
• Loop current measurement
• Tone measurement (additional test equipment at subscriber side needed).
The TAP101 supports in addition
• Quick line test
• Loop resistance measurement with additional detection of short circuit versusoff-hook condition
• Noise measurement with 15 kHz flat filter.
Important! For integrated testing every shelf must be equipped with a testapplication pack.
Specifications
Storage: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, class 1.2.
Transportation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3.
Indoor operation: Conforms to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E.
Comcode: 108045360 (TAP100), 109555532 (TAP100B), 109195222 (TAP101).
Service independent common packs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-37
Functional block diagram
The following figure shows the TAP functional block diagram.
Faceplate
The following figure shows the TAP faceplate.
TAP-B
COMDACs(Optional Duplex Mode)- Communications and Control
TAP100/TAP100B /TAP101
+5V
Control
PowerModule
-48V
Ringing
AnalogMeasurement
Hardware
Digital Signal ProcessorMeasurementProcessing
Service independent common packs Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-38 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Service independent common packs Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-39
LEDs
LED indicator on the TAP faceplate:
LED Function Color
FAULT Pack out of order (Error)
Lit when a fault is detected on the testapplication pack.
Flashes at a rate of approximately 1 Hz duringpack initialization (built-in self-test).
Red
Pin assignment
Pin assignment of the TAP AP connector:
Wiring side
BL/Y
Y/BLTip
RingR32
T32Tip
RingR16
T16
Tip
RingR17
T17Tip
RingR1
T1
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R31
T31
R30
T30
R29
T29
R28
T28
R27
T27
R26
T26
R25
T25
R24
T24
R23
T23
R22
T22
R21
T21
R20
T20
R19
T19
R18
T18
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
BL/Y
Y/BL
BL/BK
BK/BL
BL/R
R/BL
BL/W
W/BL
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
G/W
W/G
O/W
W/O
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
G/R
R/G
O/R
R/O
S/BK
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
G/BK
BK/G
O/BK
BK/O
Blue binderOrange binder
TAP Equipment (EQ)
TAP Facility (FAC)*
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used3367
Short
68 34
Short
236
35 1
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of theAP cable connector of the a/b-cable(identical to the contact side of the AP)
The top pair (34 & 68)
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
circuit pack that the connector
is attached.
For the TAP10xonly 2 a/b ports are used
*For the TAP10x the test pathTAP_FACis currently not supported.
Service independent common packs Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-40 363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
Physical dimensions
Dimensions of the TAP in mm:
Pack Height Depth Width
TAP 3N (336 mm) 200 mm 25 mm
Service independent common packs Test Application Pack (TAP100/TAP100B/TAP101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................363-211-251Issue 14, September 2008
10-41